2014 Dar t

2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Dar t
Chrysler Group LLC
14PFD41-126-AC Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci- vehicle.
dents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im-
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a provements to its products without imposing any obligation
friend, or use public transportation. upon itself to install them on products previously manufac-
tured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your per-
ceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler Group LLC
drink and then drive.
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 10
 INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5

1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through VIN Location
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
 INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

Right Front Body VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS 2
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. .12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped . . .13 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped . . .14 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .27 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .28 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .56
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .57
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Belt Pretensioning And Load Limitation . . . . . .59 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .106
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 2
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .67 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with released from the START position, the switch automati-
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Node (KIN).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
display the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger 2
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
1 — OFF have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
If your vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
1 — OFF or lock cylinders with either side up.
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch 2
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.

Standard Blade Ignition Key

Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition
to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will
display in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal (KIN) feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
into the lock cylinders with either side up. information.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death. 2
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is CAUTION!
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
dren should be warned not to touch the parking remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not SENTRY KEY®
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
mode. A child could operate power windows, other system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
controls, or move the vehicle. is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
(Continued)
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system uses a Key or Key Fob with Remote Keyless If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
Entry (RKE) transmitter, an RF receiver, and either an vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) or a Keyless Ignition seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
Node (KIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
Therefore, only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to as possible by an authorized dealer.
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
CAUTION!
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, problems and loss of security protection.
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
engine being shut off after two seconds. been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Replacement Keys NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an
NOTE: Only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
authorized dealer.
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once a Key or Key Fob is programmed to a Customer Key Programming 2
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. Programming Keys or Key Fobs with RKE transmitters
may be performed at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
General Information
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided subject to the following conditions:
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. • This device must accept any interference that may be
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- received, including interference that may cause unde-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a sired operation.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved Rearming Of The System
by the party responsible for compliance could void the If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
user’s authority to operate the equipment. disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors rearm itself.
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. This system may also incorporate a To Arm The System
ultrasonic intrusion sensor that monitors for motion in Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
the vehicle. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will provide the following audible and 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle And Operating⬙ for further information).
Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the To Disarm The System
vehicle: The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch the following methods:
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
further information). To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
3. If any doors are open, close them. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP but-
ton (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
vehicle).
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N- system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
turn the key to the ON position. Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
NOTE:
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Vehicle Security Alarm. becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any Tamper Alert
door the alarm will sound.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Use The Panic Alarm • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
the PANIC button on the Key Fob/Remote for at least Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system. 2
one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals Security System Manual Override
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
lights will turn on.
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a ILLUMINATED ENTRY
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
(24 km/h) or greater. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
NOTE: doors or open any door.

• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
and horn will remain on. ther information.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position. ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis- Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Unlock The Doors Flash Lights With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE This feature will cause the signal lights to flash when the
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal can be turned on or turned off. To change the current 2
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
illuminated entry system will also turn on. Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using The Panic Alarm
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
Sound Horn With Lock second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights, park lights and turn signals will flash, the
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turn on.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
Instrument Panel” for further information. you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
To Unlatch The Trunk
(24 km/h) or greater.
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
NOTE:
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
by the system. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. 2
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
Programming Additional Transmitters
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
performed at an authorized dealer.
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
Transmitter Battery Replacement “gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
operation.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the elastomer seal during removal.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
following conditions: Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
while still maintaining security. The system has
• This device must accept any interference received, includ- a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
distance, check for these two conditions: reduce this range.

1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of

the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
How To Use Remote Start • System not disabled from previous remote start event
All of the following conditions must be met before the • Vehicle security alarm not active
engine will remote start:
• Ignition in OFF position 2
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed WARNING!

• Hood closed • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
• Trunk closed oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
• Hazard switch off Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
• Battery at an acceptable charge level away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
• RKE panic button not pushed could cause serious injury or death.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle To Enter Remote Start Mode
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the Push and release the REMOTE START button on
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema- the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
turely: The vehicle doors will lock, parking lights will
flash and the horn will chirp twice (if pro-
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
grammed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low • If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start mode.
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
to the ON/RUN position. in the Remote Start mode.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position beforeUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if 2
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
Vehicle push and release the START/STOP button (vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) or insert the key
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
and turn it to the RUN position (vehicles not equipped
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
or ⬙Remote Start Active Key to Run⬙ (vehicles not
Start request.
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) will display in the
EVIC until you push the START button or turn the key to
the RUN position.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.

Door Lock Knob

If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Power Door Locks
WARNING!
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
• For personal security and safety in the event of an panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as 2
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN Power Door Lock Switch
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further your authorized dealer per written request of the cus-
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things tomer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
If you push the power door lock switch while the key is
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
power door locks if:
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
key from the ignition or closing the door will allow the abled.
locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
reminder to remove the Key Fob.
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. 4. Any door is opened.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically 5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. 2
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System WARNING!
1. Open the rear door. Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a small coin into Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position. from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
rotate the door lock button to the unlocked position, roll sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
down the window, and open the door using the outside sponse time.
door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE: The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- 2
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Push”).

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Push” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Door 1st Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Push”, refer to Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
ment Panel” for further information. is in the OFF position.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other • The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out- Passive Entry door handles.
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
knobs.
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle). • There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
Entry door handle.
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the • Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Enter The Trunk NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
trunk lid, the trunk lid will automatically unlatch, unless
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit- 2
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
located on the deck lid.
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.

Trunk Unlock Button

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: WINDOWS
• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you Power Windows
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This door windows. 2
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.

Power Window Switches

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
WARNING! (Continued)
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the trapped by the windows while operating the power
power window switches will remain active for up to 10 window switches. Such entrapment may result in
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. serious injury or death.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in Driver One Touch Down
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
formation.
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent
and release, and the window will go down automatically.
WARNING!
To open the window part way, push the window switch
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do to the first detent and release it when you want the
not let children play with power windows. Do not window to stop.
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
(Continued)
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If NOTE:
Equipped
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
Express Down closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
Push the switch for less than a half a second and release.
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 2
The window will go down automatically. switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
Manual Down
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
Push the switch for more than a half a second and release closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
when you want the window to stop. first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Express Up
WARNING!
Lift the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go up automatically. There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
Manual Up window before closing.
Lift the switch for more than a half a second and release
when you want the window to stop.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Reset Auto-Up push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
push and release the window lockout button again
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
(setting it in the UP position).
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the Window Lockout Switch
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the The trunk lid can be released from
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the inside the vehicle by pushing the 2
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain TRUNK RELEASE button located
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- on the instrument panel to the left
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with of the steering wheel.
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting. NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
pushing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using WARNING!
the external release switch located on the underside of
the decklid overhang. The release feature will function Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition. either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
will reappear once the trunk is closed. in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open heat stroke.
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release Some of the most important safety features in your
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event vehicle are the restraint systems:
of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
2
be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle
all passengers
attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Driver Side and Passenger Knee Airbags
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant

Trunk Emergency Release

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners and load NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
limiters that may enhance occupant protection by inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
managing occupant energy during an impact event rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
buckled up in a rear seat.
item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. WARNING!
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether years or younger, including a child in a rearward
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold facing infant seat.
infant and child restraint systems. For more information • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for vehicle with a rear seat.
CHildren (LATCH).
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be shoulder belts properly.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use 2
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
their arm. vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
between you and the door.
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
Refer to “Child Restraints”. modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
You should read the instructions provided with your the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
Always wear your seat belts even though you have vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
air bags. vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
could cause serious injury, including death. Air Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably you to be severely injured or killed.
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
instrument panel.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
far away from home or on your own street.
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

(Continued)
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
WARNING!
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat 2
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the belts.
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
be belted at all times. using a seat belt properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belts • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with your body. These are the strongest parts of your
lap/shoulder belts. body and can take the forces of a collision best.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
vehicle or being thrown out. safe, too.

(Continued)
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.

Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your
body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in
a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take
the force in a collision.

(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the Removing Slack From Belt
belt in a collision.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
WARNING!
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. 2
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdo-
men. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as WARNING!
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi- Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
ately and have it fixed. not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac- etc.) or if the air bag deployed.
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder beltprefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it it is locked in position.
up or down to the position that fits you best. In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. Driver Center Passenger
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
First Row N/A N/A ALR
the latch plate.
Second ALR ALR ALR
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the Row 2
folded webbing.
• N/A — Not Applicable
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For ALR and is being used for normal usage:
additional information, refer to Child Restraints under Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
further information. The chart below defines the type of activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
feature for each seating position. ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click⬙.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Equipped hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
locking mode.
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until working properly when checked according to the
the entire belt is extracted. procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Energy Management Feature are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt
systems in the event of a collision. These devices may
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision. 2
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those
collision.
in child restraints.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
the occupant’s chest. worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
Belt Pretensioning And Load Limitation
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
The driver and passenger front seating positions are sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
equipped with seat belt systems that may incorporate a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
retractor pretensioning devices, anchor/buckle preten-
sioning devices, and load limiting devices. These devices
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(BeltAlert®) (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
fastened. the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. deactivating BeltAlert®.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase
the best way to keep the baby safe. the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat 2
belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug,
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. store the extender when not needed.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
the force if there is a collision.
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
Seat Belt Extender driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
tender and store it.
panel below the steering column.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
1 — Driver And Passenger 2 — Supplemental Driver And
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Advanced Front Air Bags Passenger Side Knee Air Bags/
This vehicle may be equipped with a front passenger
Knee Bolsters
occupant classification system (OCS) that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air based upon occupant weight.
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Air Bag System Components
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC system components:
air bags are located above the side windows and their 2
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Air Bag Warning Light
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
• Steering Wheel and Column
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in • Instrument Panel
the outboard side of the front seats and the rear seats (if
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
equipped with rear seat SAB).
• Knee Impact Bolsters
NOTE:
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment. • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
authorized dealer immediately.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
WARNING!
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and • No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
• Occupant Classification System (OCS) objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
Advanced Front Air Bag Features collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage • Do not put anything on or around the air bag
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as damage the air bags and you could be injured
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), because the air bags may no longer be functional.
which may receive information from the front impact The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
sensors. designed to open only when the air bags are
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an inflating.
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is any way.
used for more severe collisions. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such
as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may (SABIC)
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that 2
label sewn into the outboard side of the front and rear provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
seats (if equipped with rear seat SAB). inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward,
front and side of the seat’s back trim cover (front seats) or
covering both windows on the impact side.
between the top and side seat’s cushion trim cover (rear
seat). Each air bag deploys independently; a left side NOTE:
impact deploys the left air bags only and a right-side
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
impact deploys the right air bags only.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the side air bags during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
WARNING!
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection. • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
restraint system. enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
Occupants, including children who are up against or very should remain free from any obstructions.
close to SABIC or SAB air bags can be seriously injured or • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
killed. between you and the SAB; the performance could
Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or be adversely affected and/or objects could be
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the pushed into you, causing serious injury.
SABIC or SAB air bags inflate, even if they are in an • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
infant or child restraint. not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the vehicle for any reason.
child.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Knee Impact Bolsters Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag,
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air Bag, and front 2
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on several
Air Bags.
factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and
Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver and Pas-
Front Passenger Knee Air Bags are designed to provide
senger Side Knee Air Bags and the knee bolsters to
additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
provide improved protection for the driver and front
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
improve occupant protection.
Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Passenger Knee Air Bags are not expected to reduce the
risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and
required for this vehicle. Front Passenger Knee Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver and Front Passen- or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
ger Knee Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
front-end damage but that produce a severe initial decelera- on and the air bags will not inflate.
tion.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
type of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should when the ignition is first turned on. After the
have deployed. self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating air bag. or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is following:
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. 2
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) located in the
WARNING! front passenger seat
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- • OCS Sensor located in the front passenger seat
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags • Air Bag Warning Light
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the passenger
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the inflation rate of the passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
air bag system immediately. the sensors estimate that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
light objects in it; or
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for • The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
this vehicle. senger, including a child; or
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearward * It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
facing infant seat; or allowing a full-power front passenger air bag deploy-
ment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
seat and never install a child restraint system, including
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
a rearward-facing infant seat, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air
Occupant Status Bag Classification WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant Reduced-power • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
seat* deployment air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Child, including a child in Full-power deployment Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
a forward-facing child OR reduced-power years or younger, including a child in a rearward
restraint or booster seat* deployment facing infant seat.
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment • Children 12 years or younger should always ride
OR reduced-power buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child
deployment restraint.
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power
deployment
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
The OCM works with the OCS sensor to determine the • Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
front passenger seat occupant’s most probable classifica- ably on or near the floor
tion. The OCS sensor estimates the weight on the front
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
passenger seat and where that weight is located. The 2
seat back in an upright position
OCM communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should
be modified.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward

Seated Properly
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The OCS may not classify the front passenger properly if:
WARNING!
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
Occupants in the front passenger seat sitting improp- part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
erly may cause the OCS to not classify the passen- ment panel)
ger’s weight accurately. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always wear your seat • The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
belt and sit properly, with the seat back in an upright around
position, your back against the seat back, sitting • The front passenger seatback is not in the full upright
upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with position
your feet comfortably on or near the floor. Do not
carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) • The front passenger carries or holds an object while
while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
object may cause the OCS to not classify the passen-
ger’s weight accurately, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

WARNING!
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working 2
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger.

The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on whenever

the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the
operation of the air bag system.
Not Seated Properly
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front passenger seat is equipped with Flip ’n Stow™ any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Front Passenger Seat Storage (refer to “Understanding Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for additional informa- be used.
tion). Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere with the WARNING!
latch before closing the seat. In addition, after closing the
Front Passenger Seat Storage bin make sure the front Make sure that objects inside the Flip ’n Stow™
passenger seat cushion is pushed downward and fully Front Passenger Seat Storage bin do not interfere
latched to the base. Over-stuffing the storage bin may with the latch before closing the seat. In addition,
result in misclassification of the front passenger’s weight. after closing the Front Passenger Seat Storage bin,
make sure the front passenger seat cushion is pushed
The passenger seat assembly contains critical compo- downward and fully latched to the base. Overstuff-
nents that may affect front passenger Advanced Air Bag ing the storage bin, or a not fully latched passenger
inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify a front seat cushion, may result in misclassification of the
seat passenger, the OCS components must function as front passenger’s weight. This may result in serious
designed. Do not make any modifications to the front injury or death in a collision.
passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat
cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
WARNING!
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
components in any way.
the passenger seat assembly, its related components, 2
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
the specific model being repaired. Always use the could result in death or serious injury to the front
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle. passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. (CMVSS).
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC .
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
Inflator Units vent holes of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not
interfere with your control of the vehicle.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. Unit
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
The Supplemental Knee Air Bag units are located in the
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
instrument panel trim beneath the steering column and
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
below the glove compartment. When the ORC detects a
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units.
are possible, based on several factors, including the
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
the Supplemental Knee Air Bags. The Supplemental Knee
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
Air Bag deploys down and around the knee blocker/
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
glove box surface allowing the air bags to inflate to the
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 15 to 20 mil-
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
liseconds.
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
Inflator Units (SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions. particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may 2
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based the severity and type of colli-
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
sion.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflators on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 mil-
inflating SABs exit through the seat seam into the space
liseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to
between the occupant and the door. The SABs fully
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
a very high speed and with such a high force that it could
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
curtain air bag is only about 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick
especially applies to children.
when it is inflated.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of the battery has power, until the ignition key is re-
whether or not an air bag should have deployed. moved.
Front And Side Impact Sensors • Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
events. changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System If A Deployment Occurs
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
the communication network remains intact, and the immediately after deployment.
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
the air bag system.
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
or all of the following may occur: throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in- 2
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
structions for cleaning.
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. bags will not be in place to protect you.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a WARNING!
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system not function properly if modifications are made.
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
be injured if the air bag system is not there to air bag system service. If your seat, including your
protect you. Do not modify the components or trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
add aftermarket side steps or running boards. modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Air Bag Warning Light NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly 2
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
fuse is good.
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the air bag system immediately.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
first cycled to the ON/RUN position. bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
is designed to record such data as: personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened; In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Child Restraints
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States, and every Canadian province, requires
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly NOTE:
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
the rear seats rather than in the front. 2
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
children from newborn size to the child almost large
childsafety-index-53.htm
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the WARNING!
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has hold even an infant on your lap could become so
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety great that you could not hold the child, no matter
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install how strong you are. The child and others could be
it in the vehicle where you will use it. badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Toddlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
height or weight limits of their child seat of the vehicle
restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
who have out-grown the height or weight five-point Harness, facing forward in the
limit of their rear-facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
forward-facing child restraint, but are too hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt vehicle
Children Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
for Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight limit the vehicle
of their booster seat
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Infants And Child Restraints their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat. 2
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible WARNING!
child seats. • Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. years or younger, including a child in a rearward
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward- facing infant seat.
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward- vehicle with a rear seat.
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
who are over two years old or who have outgrown the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing con- installing an infant or child restraint.
vertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward- • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
seat belt. could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Children Too Large For Booster Seats If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
over the front of the seat when their back is against the odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A 2
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
vehicle’s seat belt alone: move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of correctly.
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front WARNING!
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
way back?
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder will not protect a child properly, which may result in
between their neck and arm? serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
correctly.
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top
Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint Only + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
Restraint System has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the 2
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
child restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the 2
LATCH anchorage system once the com-
bined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center Yes You can install child restraints with flexible
position using the inner LATCH lower lower anchors in the center position. The
anchorages? inner anchorages are 17 inches (440 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Can two child restraints be attached using No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it 2
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages

behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window. They are found under a plastic cover
with the tether anchorage symbol on it.

Tether Strap Anchorages

 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
WARNING!
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH- 2
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some compatible child restraints next to each other, you
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-
Center Seat LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-
ments in the center seating position. Only install this type Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- restraint systems will be installed as described here.
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint 4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
ing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt
following the instructions below. See the section “Install- 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
ing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
what type of seat belt each seating position has. Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tions to attach a tether anchor.
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
anchorages. in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for turer’s instructions.
that seating position. For some second row seats, you 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
WARNING!
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being • Improper installation of a child restraint to the
used by other occupants or being used to secure child LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant 2
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of • Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Belt Restraints in this Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using
weight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint the seat belt to install a forward facing
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a child restraint, up to the recommended
forward facing child restraint? weight limit of the child restraint. 2
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
the back of the front passenger seat? and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten Yes In positions with cinching latch plates
the seat belt against the belt path of the (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
child restraint? up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
position. For some second row seats, you may need to retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint. seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
“click”. tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
against the child seat. the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction. path. 2
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. “click”.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to vehicle seat.
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
You may also move the front seat forward to allow Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
more room for the car seat. anchor.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
any direction. into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon- 1. Look behind the seating position where you
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short plan to install the child restraint to find the
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert tether anchorage. You may need to move the
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button seat forward to provide better access to the
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child that seating position, move the child restraint to another
restraint. position in the vehicle if one is available.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 2
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to Transporting Pets
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
WARNING! Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
tether strap. drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
opening between the seatbacks as you remove 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
slack in the strap.
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
mental and should be avoided. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. 2
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a SAFETY TIPS
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate Transporting Passengers
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to AREA.
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. WARNING!
CAUTION! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil cause serious injury or death.
in the engine or damage may result.
(Continued)
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people follow these safety tips:
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
injured or killed. confined areas any longer than needed to move
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your your vehicle in or out of the area.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
belts. rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
using a seat belt properly. set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
Exhaust Gas • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
WARNING! controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon blower at high speed.
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
(Continued)
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat 2
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
Air Bag Warning Light
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised The light should come on and remain on for
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
not lit during starting, see your authorized
Vehicle
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
Seat Belts driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
WARNING!
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper- sonal injury.
able. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
Floor Mat Safety Information • Never place or install floor mats or other floor
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals vehicle.
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

(Continued)
 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
WARNING! (Continued)
The Vehicle
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have Tires
been removed for cleaning. Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
2
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob- lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
control. (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory. Lights
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
mounting can cause interference with the brake exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
control of the vehicle. panel.
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .123 3
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .119 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .119
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And 䡵 Uconnect® Phone (Uconnect® 200) . . . . . . . . . .133
Approach Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment . . . . . .225
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect® 200) . . . . . . . .201 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
3
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .236 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .245
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .247 ▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .249 ▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .250 ▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — ▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .265
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .268
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .274 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .285
3
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .275 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 ▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .279 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .283
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 ▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .296
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 ▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear
Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat
Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with 3
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
Automatic Dimming Mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
CAUTION! passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
to the Front and Rear Doors.
forward, full rearward and normal.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 3
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
Lighting — If Equipped
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs. NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
trim panel. mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Control
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the ing the visor to block out the sun.
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
1. Fold down the sun visor.
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip. 3
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
vehicle is stationary.

Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
3
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
BSM Warning Light verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
proximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are Entering From The Side
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
contamination so that the BSM system can function
side of the vehicle.
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning 3
light will not illuminate.

Rear Monitoring

Overtaking/Approaching
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.

Stationary Objects

Overtaking/Passing
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped 3
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path

Opposing Traffic
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
RCP Detection Zones parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
situations. death.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Modes Of Operation Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/ the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime 3
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM tected object are present on the same side at the same
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the be reduced.
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible NOTE:
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced. • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with General Information
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
the RCP state always requests the chime. Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Blind Spot Alert Off Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems. 2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
eration of the device.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
used. other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Uconnect® Phone (Uconnect® 200) For additional information on Uconnect®:
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • U.S. residents - visit http://www.DriveUconnect.com
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al- or call 1-877-855-8400.
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ • Canadian Residents - visit http://www.DriveUconnect.ca
or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 3
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
(French).
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
microphone for private conversation.
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
supported phones. standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
For Uconnect® phone compatibility - visit nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
http://www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
Canadian Residents – visit http://www.UconnectPhone.com mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
or call, 1-800-465–2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French). long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the you press the Uconnect® Phone button you will
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a
used with the system at a time. The system is available in command.
English, Spanish, or French languages. Voice Command Button
WARNING! When you press the Voice Command but-
ton you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your
Any voice commanded system should be used only signal to give a command.
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at- The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
tention should be focused on safely operating the Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
causing serious injury or death. mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
Uconnect® Phone Button
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
The steering wheel controls will contain the cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
two control buttons (Uconnect® Phone but- can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
ton and Voice Command button) that knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
will enable you to access the system. When switch), if so equipped.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
the Uconnect® Phone such as “Phone” or caller ID. compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
Operation
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect® example, you can use the compound form voice com-
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone mand “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the 3
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most compound form command into two voice commands:
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
specific command and then guided through the available Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
options. normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
beep. Voice Command Tree
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup”, “Device
Pairing” and then “Pair a Device”, the following
compound command can be said: “Setup”, “Device
Pairing” and “Pair a Bluetooth® Device”.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help Command To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instruc-
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
tions for pairing.
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will then play some of
the options. NOTE: If other phones are present during the pairing
process make sure they are switched to off or the
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
bluetooth is disabled before proceeding.
button and follow the audible prompts for direc-
tions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
the button on the steering wheel. pairing instructions:
Cancel Command • Press the button to begin.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a “Device Pairing”.
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu. • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
• Push the button to begin.
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
• You will then be asked “Should paired device be set as
Favorite?” If yes this phone will become the highest • The system will prompt you to say the number you 3
priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to want to call.
your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time,
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to
your Uconnect® System. The priority allows the • The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile phone to use and then dial. The number will appear in the display
if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same of certain radios.
time.
Call By Saying A Name
• Start paring procedure on device. See device manual
• Press the button to begin.
for instructions.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Select Uconnect® on the device and enter the four-
“Call”.
digit Personal Identification Number (PIN) displayed
on radio into your mobile phone.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
person you want to call. Transfer From Mobile Phone
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
the name of the person you want to call. For example, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
you can say “john doe” or “john doe, mobile”, where names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Uconnect® phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to Uconnect® website for supported phones.
“Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook”, in the • To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
phonebook. downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then by Saying a Name” section.
dial the corresponding phone number, which may • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
appear in the display of certain radios. as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
to the Uconnect® Phone. edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
phone connection.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook 3
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
able for use.
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
• Press the button to begin.
phone is accessible.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
“Phonebook New Entry.”
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book. However, if there is less than 10 contacts in the • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
mobile phone, the SIM contacts may also download. long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob.”
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic down-
book entry, if desired.
loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
• Press the button to begin.
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
“Phonebook Edit.”
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
main menu. entry that you wish to edit.
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
names in the phonebook with each name having up to mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
phonebook entry that you are editing.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
to the main menu. entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
from which you choose. To select one of the entries 3
number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
say “Delete.”
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
feature. • After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
• Press the button to begin. language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete.” deleted or edited.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List All Uconnect® Phonebook Names Phone Call Features
• Press the button to begin. The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
“Phonebook List Names.”
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- cellular service provider for the features that you have.
book entries, if available. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
• To call one of the names in the list, press the but- Currently In Progress
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say When you receive a call on your cellular phone, you will
“Call.” have the option of Answer, Ignore, or Transfer. The cursor
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” will begin on Answer. Rotating the scroll knob will move
operations at this point. between the options, pressing Enter will select the cur-
rent item. After accepting the call, the options on the
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the screen will be End, Transfer, Hold, and Mute. The top line
number designation you wish to call. will display the contact, if the contact is not in the
• The selected number will be dialed. phonebook or the phonebook has not been downloaded
the phone number will be displayed on the screen.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call, Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
press and hold the button until you hear a single Progress
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected. To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” fol-
Currently In Progress lowed by the phone number or phonebook entry you
wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the 3
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
combine two calls, refer to “Conference Call” in this
mobile phone. Press the button to place the current
section.
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
only answer an incoming call or ignore it. bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls Call Termination
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but-
press the button until you hear a single beep, ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
indicating that the active and hold status of the two there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far
hold at a time. end, a call on hold may not become active automati-
Conference Call cally. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), back from hold, press and hold the button until you
press and hold the button until you hear a double hear a single beep.
beep indicating that the two calls have been joined Redial
into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling • Press the button to begin.
To initiate three-way calling, press the button while a • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as “Redial.”
described under “Making a Second Call While Cur-
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
rent Call is in Progress.” After the second call has
was dialed from your mobile phone.
established, press and hold the button until you
hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect® Phone Features
Uconnect® Phone.
Language Selection
Call Continuation
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the using:
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been 3
• Press the button to begin.
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types: • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
English, Espanol, or Francais.
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
cancellation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and language selection.
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can voice commands will be in that language.
continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain dura-
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance NOTE:
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
reachable: where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.,
Canada, and Mexico). The number dialed may not be
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
applicable with the available mobile service and area.
number for your area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
follows:
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
• Press the button to begin.
chances of successfully making a phone call as com-
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say pared to using the mobile phone directly.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emer- country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069
gency, your mobile phone must be: for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for
• turned on, Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
• paired to the Uconnect® System, in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour “Roadside Assis- 3
• and have network coverage. tance” coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty
Roadside Assistance Information Booklet and the 24-Hour Roadside Assis-
tance references.
If you need roadside assistance:
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• Press the button to begin. some systems. To do this, press the button and say
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
“Roadside Assistance”. Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Mail Calling followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required
to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #),
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
you can press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.
with Automated Systems.⬙
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed
Working With Automated Systems by “Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
This method is used in instances where one generally has automated customer service center menu structure,
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while and to leave a number on a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system. You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
system or an automated service, such as a paging service entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
or automated customer service line. Some services re- call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, system will prompt you to say the “number.” If you
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone. wish to send the name say “Send Name” followed by
a valid name from the phonebook. Uconnect® Phone
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that will then send the corresponding phone number asso-
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence ciated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the phone.
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
NOTE: Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
network configurations. This is normal. from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the • Press the button to begin. 3
use of this feature. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Barge In — Overriding Prompts one of the following:
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you – “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice – “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you Phone And Network Status Indicators
could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such
select that option without having to listen to the rest of as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your
the voice prompt. mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide notifica-
tion to inform you of your phone and network status when
you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect®
Phone. The status is given for network signal strength,
phone battery strength, etc.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing able to hear the conversation coming from the other
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By mute the Uconnect® Phone:
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
• Press the button.
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same • Following the beep, say “Mute.”
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
• Press the button.
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- • Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Mobile Phone Names
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone • Press the button to begin.
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone “Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call 3
• When prompted, say “List Phones.”
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the button • The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
and say “Transfer Call.” paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone being announced, press the button and say
“Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” phone.
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Select Another Mobile Phone Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
This feature allows you to select and start using another • Press the button to begin.
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• Press the button to begin. “Setup Phone Pairing.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. prompts.
• You can also press the button at any time while • You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone the list is being played, and then choose the phone
that you wish to select. you wish to delete.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
call. If the selected phone is not available, the Phone
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
within 30 ft. [9 m]) the vehicle. To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Voice Training You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect® phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
dures: running, all windows closed, and the blower fan 3
switched off.
From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode): This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or, Reset
• Press the button.
• Press the button and say the “Voice Training,”
“System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” com- • After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
mand. “Setup,” then “Reset.”
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Command • Performance is maximized under:
Uconnect® Voice Command Tutorial • Low-To-Medium Blower Setting.
To hear a brief tutorial of the Voice Command features, • Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
press the button and say “Voice Command Tuto-
• Low Road Noise.
rial.”
• Smooth Road Surface.
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the • Fully Closed Windows.
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Dry Weather Condition.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from cents, the system may not always work for some.
you.
• When navigating through an automated system such
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
during a Voice Command period. speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance
not in motion is recommended.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo- 3
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the • Low Road Noise
entries are not similar.
• Smooth Road Surface
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
• Fully Closed Windows
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• Dry Weather Conditions
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s)
zero all
one call
two cancel
three confirmation prompts
four continue
five delete
six dial
seven download
eight edit
nine emergency
star (*) English
plus (+) erase all
pound (#) Espanol
add location Francais
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s)
help previous
home record again
language redial 3
list names return to main menu return or main menu
list phones select phone select
mobile send
mute set up phone settings or phone
mute off set up
new entry towing assistance
no transfer call
other Uconnect® Tutorial
pair a phone voice training
phone pairing pairing work
phonebook phone book yes
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Text Reply Send Messages:
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
your phone. a new message:
Read Messages: • Press the button.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
connected to Uconnect® Phone and your phone is sup- “SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
ported, an announcement will be made to notify you that
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
message:
To send a message, press the button while the
• Press the button.
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.” Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
you. List of Preset Messages:

After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” 1. Yes

the message using Uconnect® Phone. 2. No
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3. Where are you? 16. Can this wait?
4. I need more direction. 17. Bye for now
5. L O L 18. When can we meet
6. Why 19. Send number to call
3
7. I love you 20. Start without me
8. Call me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
9. Call me later Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
10. Thanks
sages.
11. See You in 15 minutes
• Press the button.
12. I am on my way
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
13. I’ll be late “Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth® Communication Link Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
Bluetooth® ON mode.
phone.
General Information
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
Voice Activated Features:
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: • Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo-
bile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the • Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
user’s authority to operate the equipment. SMS messages.
• This device may not cause harmful interference. • Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- • Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
eration.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call • Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
Back”).
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” touchscreen.
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
Recent Calls”).
to connect to them quickly. 3
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
Smith Mobile”).
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Screen Activated Features Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. vehicles audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. For
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis- Uconnect® customer support, visit the following web-
played on the touchscreen. site:
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are • U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen. 1-877-855-8400.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs. • Canadian residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
(French).
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
microphone for private conversation. has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio
WARNING! devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with
Any voice commanded system should be used only the system at a time. The system is available in English,
in safe driving conditions following all applicable Spanish, or French languages.
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the Uconnect® Phone Button
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident The Uconnect® Phone button is used to
causing serious injury or death. enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
phonebook etc., When you press the button
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
a command.
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Uconnect® Voice Command Button Operation
The Uconnect® Voice Command button Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
is only used for “barge in” and when you are Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
already in a call and you want to send Tones menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
or make another call. Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
The button is also used to access the Voice Com- ods for how Voice Command works:
3
mands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if 1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect® bile.”
Voice Command section for direction on how to use
the button. 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the ve-
hicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone You will be prompted for a specific command and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control guided through the available options.
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
switch), if so equipped. beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be Natural Speech
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com- Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-
bile.” Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
compound command form of the voice command is and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
given. You can also break the commands into parts and would like to.”
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
can break the compound command form into two Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
works best when you talk in a normal conversational do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ requested but the specific name was not recognized.
meters away from you.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system Cancel Command
requires more information from the user it will ask a At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
question to which the user can respond without pressing you will be returned to the main menu.
the “Voice Command” button on your steering
wheel. You can also push the or button on your
steering wheel when the system is listening for a 3
Voice Command Tree command and be returned to the main or previous
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. menu.
Help Command Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
the beep.
NOTE:
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your mobile
the button on your steering wheel and say a
phone to complete this procedure.
command or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone ses-
sions begin with a press of the button on the radio • The vehicle must be in PARK.
control head.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.

Mobile Phone Pairing

3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key
from the Uconnect® Phone main screen.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process. 3
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen
while the system is connecting.

Mobile Phone Pairing Progress

5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair Additional Mobile Phones NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
screen.
priority.
2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key. You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • “Show Paired Phones”
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
screen. • “Connect My Phone”
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
while the system is connecting. 1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, 2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make 3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take Audio Devices screen.
precedence over other paired phones within range. 4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the You can also use the following VR command to bring up
system, a pop-up will appear. a list of paired audio devices:
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en- • “Show Paired Phones”
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
• “Connect My Phone”
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or 3
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
Audio Device After Pairing
while the system is connecting.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high-
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make Device follow these steps:
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range. 1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Paired Phone” or “Paired Audio Source”
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
soft-key.
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher 3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the particular
priority. Audio Device.
4. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device 4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key. 5. Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Paired Phone” or “Audio Device” soft-key. 6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
device name.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
5. Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the
6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen. device name.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device 4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key. 5. Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
chosen device move to the top of the list.
2. Touch the “Pair Phone” or “Audio Device” soft-key.
6. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
3. Touch the “+” soft-key located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
than the currently connected device.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- 3
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
Uconnect® website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported able for use.
phones.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book, phone is accessible.
follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS” section. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for phone connection.
example, after you start the vehicle.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
phone main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phone-
book from the Phone main screen, then select the
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”
Phonebook Favorites
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the “+” soft-key located to the right of
the phonebook record. Select an empty entry and
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
touch the “+” on that selected entry. When the Options To Remove A Favorite
pop-up appears, touch “Add from Mobile.” You will
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
then be asked which contact and number to choose
Phone main screen.
from your mobile phonebook. When complete the
new favorite will be shown. 2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key. 3
3. Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.

Add From Mobile

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance
Remove From Favorites Favorites.
4. The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
3. Touch the + Options soft-key.
Favs.”
4. Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-
way calling, this feature can be accessed through the 3
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
vider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect® Phone.
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose • Redial
between Editing the number or resetting the number • Dial by pressing in the number
to default.
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Mobile Phonebook 3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
• Recent Call Log
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
• SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
Dial By Saying A Number The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
1. Press the button to begin, features:
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, • Answer
say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”
• End
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number
• Ignore
151-1234-5555.
• Hold/unhold
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Mute/unmute
1. Press the button on your steering wheel to begin.
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.” • Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Touch-Tone Number Entry Recent Calls
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen. You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
3
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the “VR” button on your steering wheel while in
a call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored
in your mobile phonebook.

Recent Calls
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Missed Calls Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
• All Calls
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls” Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
soft-key on the Phone main screen. tem. Press the button on your steering wheel to
You can also press the button and say “Show my accept the call. You can also touch the “answer”
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming soft-key or touch the caller ID box.
calls will be displayed.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
You can also press the button and say “Show my Currently In Progress
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen If a call is currently in progress and you have another
will be displayed. incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,” call waiting that you normally hear when using your
“Recent” or “Missed.” mobile phone. Press the phone button on the steer-
ing wheel, “answer” soft-key or caller ID box to place
the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the Toggling Between Calls
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen.
only answer an incoming call or ignore it. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
You can also press the button on the steering wheel 3
Progress to toggle between the active and held phone call.
You can place a call on hold by touching the “Hold”
Join Calls
soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
to “Join Calls” in this section. Call Termination
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold To end a call in progress, momentarily press the but-
During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the ton on the steering wheel or the “end” soft-key. Only
Phone main screen. the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call
on hold, it will become the new active call.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial Uconnect® Phone Features
Touch the “Redial” soft-key, or press the and after the Emergency Assistance
“Listening” prompt and the following beep, say “Re-
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
dial.”
reachable:
The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
dialed from your mobile phone.
number for your area.
Call Continuation
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the operational, you may reach the emergency number as
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been follows:
switched to OFF.
1. Press the button to begin.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to touch the
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
“transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: Roadside Assistance / Towing Assistance
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the If you need roadside/towing assistance:
touchscreen. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel to begin.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.” 3
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and area. NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada,
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for out-
for the mobile phone directly.
side Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
WARNING! details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in Voice Mail Calling
emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
Uconnect® Phone. with Automated Systems”.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Working With Automated Systems sequence of numbers, is also to be used for navigating
through an automated customer service center menu
This method is used in instances where one generally has
structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system. You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones
for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. For
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry with
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail Password”, then if
or automated customer service line. Some services re- you press the button on the steering wheel and say
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect® Phone will
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone. then send the corresponding phone number associ-
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that ated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the NOTE:
touchscreen or press the button on the steering
wheel and say the word “Send” then the sequence you • The first number encountered for that contact will be
wish to enter. For example, if required to enter your sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press ignored.
the button on the steering wheel and say, “Send 3 • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
7 4 6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a number, or network configurations. This is normal.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time Voice Response Length
out settings that are too short and may not allow the It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
use of this feature. Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by 1. Touch the “More” soft-key (where available), then
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®. touch the “Settings” soft-key.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing 3
a numbered sequence. 2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
Voice Response Length.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
The button on the steering wheel can be used
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue
indicate your selection.
your voice command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking “There are two numbers with the Phone And Network Status Indicators
name John. Say the full name” you could press the Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
button on the steering wheel and say, “John of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
Smith” to select that option without having to listen to
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
the rest of the voice prompt. status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mo-
bile phone, the audio will be played through your
WARNING! vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle command.
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
when using any device or feature that may take your dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
focus off the road or your hands off the steering audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe opera- tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
tion of your vehicle. We recommend against the use that the call did not go through even though the call is in
of any handheld device while driving, encourage the progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
use of voice-operated systems when possible and audio.
that you become aware of applicable laws that may Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone able to hear the conversation coming from the other
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the “Mute”
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By button on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Advanced Phone Connectivity Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the 3
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect® overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile • Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions a voice command period.
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Performance is maximized under: Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Even though international dialing for most number com-
• Low Road Noise binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
• Smooth Road Surface
Far End Audio Performance
• Fully Closed Windows
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Dry Weather Condition
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some. • Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
When navigating through an automated system such as • Low Road Noise
voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
• Smooth Road Surface
digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Fully Closed Windows
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion. • Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect® Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
3
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Voice Text List
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® to use
NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines your
vehicle is not moving.
phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Read Messages: Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will • Send a Reply
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message.”
3. Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to.
Voice Text Reply
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Press the button.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you 3
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pressing the button and
saying the message you want to send.
Preset Message List
After the system confirms that you want to send your
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
which number you would like to have the message
sent.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
Preset Message List 8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
11. See you in <number> minutes. Bluetooth® Communication Link
12. Stuck in traffic. Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
13. Start without me. can generally be re-established by switching the mobile
14. Where are you? phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode. 3
15. Are you there yet?
Power-Up
16. I need directions.
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
17. I’m lost. ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
18. See you later. must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE: 6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
which phone number you want to send a message to only the first number encountered in a contact name
for John Smith. will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in 3
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voice-
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
Calls” or “Missed Calls.” commands will return a response that the contact does
not exist in the phonebook.
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone. 9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
while the VR session is active.
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE: 5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download 3
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or commands will return a response that the contact does
“Other.” not exist in the phonebook.
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect® 200)
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
Voice Command System Operation
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and This Voice Command system allows you to
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc 3
following conditions: player, and a memo recorder.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys-
the party responsible for compliance could void the tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
user’s authority to operate the equipment. Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
• This device may not cause harmful interference. may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the Voice Command button while the
WARNING!
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
Any voice commanded system should be used only system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
in safe driving conditions following all applicable add or change commands. This will become helpful
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at- once you start to learn the options.
tention should be focused on safely operating the NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision “Help” or “Main Menu”.
causing serious injury or death.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
When you press the Voice Command button, you menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
options.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists set to low.
options, press the Voice Command button, listen
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
for the beep, and say your command.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
mand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
Commands button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to
the main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands. In this mode, you can say the following commands: 3
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active. • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing The Volume • “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
button.
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the Streaming mode)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system. • “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM Radio FM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands: this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station) • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Satellite Radio Disc Mode
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com- may say the following commands:
mands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its 3
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
spoken number)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
USB Mode
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) may say the following commands:
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode Memo Mode
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the this mode, you may say the following commands:
following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
• “Play” (to play the current track) recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by say-
• “Pause” (to pause the current track)
ing one of the following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track) – “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) – “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Main menu setup”
During the playback you may press the Voice Com- • “Switch to setup”
mand button to stop playing memos. You pro-
ceed by saying one of the following commands: In this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Language English”
3
– “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language French”
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo) • “Language Spanish”
– “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Tutorial”
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos) • “Voice Training”
Setup NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the Command button first and wait for the beep
following: before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training VOICE COMMAND
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod® and
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to SiriusXM Travel Link.
the system and will improve recognition.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
session should be completed when the vehicle is commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the or a raised voice level.
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
WARNING!
responses:
Any voice commanded system should be used only • I didn’t understand
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at- • I didn’t get that, etc.
tention should be focused on safely operating the If a command is not spoken a second time, the system 3
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision will respond with an error and give some direction as
causing serious injury or death. what can be said based on the context you are in. After
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal session will end.
to give a command. Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice
“Help.” Command button and say “Help.” You will hear
available commands for the screen displayed.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon Uconnect® Voice Commands
the active application.
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at two types of commands. Universal commands are avail-
a normal speaking volume. able at all times. Local commands are available if the
The system will best recognize your speech if the win- supported radio mode is active.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice Com-
set to low. mand button.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Changing The Volume Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. In this mode, you can say the following commands:
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice 3
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
Command button.
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume Source
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
system. Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
mode or screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE:
• You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
• You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio. 3
• You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
• You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
NOTE:
• You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any correspond-
ing names on the current device that is playing.
• You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is 3
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
• Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
• VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE:
• You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
• You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items 3
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
• You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
NOTE:
• Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
• You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
• Navigation commands only work if equipped with 3
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
NOTE: SEATS
• You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re- vehicle.
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
WARNING!
• You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,” 3
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertain- • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
ment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,” outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
“Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,” these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
“Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.” or killed.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
face and shaded grey. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
seat up, down, forward or rearward. when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward 3
to raise or lower the lumbar support.

Power Seat Recliner Switch

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar Switch
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Front Seat Adjustment
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
WARNING!
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
the lever, lean forward and release the lever. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death. 3
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.

Recline Lever
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
Seat Height Adjustment • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
Heated Seats — If Equipped insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
On some models, the front seats may be equipped with in a seat that has been overheated could cause
heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated ture of the seat.
using the Uconnect® System.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Front Heated Seat Operations — Vehicles Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
Equipped With Uconnect® 8.4 and 8.4N: once to select HI-level heating. Press the soft-
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect® key a second time to select LO-level heating.
display. Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
3

Controls Soft-Key
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt Head Restraints
within two to five minutes. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap- WARNING!
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati- erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
cally after approximately 45 minutes. pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
On models that are equipped with remote start, the or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on event of a collision.
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR. 3
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Push Button
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
downward on the head restraint.
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
WARNING!
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD downward on the head restraint.
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.

Rear Head Restraints

The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there are no occupants in the center seat
the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
for the driver.
Push Button
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Folding Rear Seat After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: The upper seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use. 3

Folded Rear Seatback

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

Rear Seatback Loops

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
WARNING!
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- of the instrument panel.
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.

Hood Release Lever

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety 3. Lift upward on the hood prop rod to release it from the
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the stowage retainer.
center front edge of the hood.

Hood Prop Rod

Hood Safety Latch
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Place the hood prop rod in the hood slot to secure the
CAUTION!
hood in the open position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
Hood Prop Rod Slot injury or death.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of

the instrument panel. This switch controls the 3
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte-
rior lights and fog lights.

Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Automatic Headlights Only)
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
position.
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
will come on in the automatic mode. information.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Headlight Time Delay NOTE:
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination • The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
vehicle in an unlit area. feature.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF • The headlight delay time is programmable using the
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
3
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
begins when the headlight switch is turned off. information.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the Equipped
delay.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
turn off in the normal manner. ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To Activate
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to position.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
ment Panel” for further information.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
at or above 15 mph (35 km/h).
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera To Deactivate
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed operation of low beams).
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
dealer.
reactivate the system.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Fog Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
ignition is placed in the RUN position, the headlights are switch.
off and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch
must be used for normal nighttime driving.
3
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Light Switch
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking Multifunction Lever
lights or the low beam headlights and press the The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
headlight switch. steering column.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Multifunction Lever
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Turn Signals Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE: High/Low Beam Switch 3
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is Flash-To-Pass
defective.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either released.
turn signal on.
NOTE: If the flash to pass is held for 20 seconds the
feature will deactivate.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
can be turned on by pressing the lens. is pressed.

To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time. Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.

Front Map/Reading Lights

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Dimmer Controls With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
located on the left side of the instrument panel. the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).

Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light Control Dome Light Position
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights and ambient light located in the overhead console. lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC, and radio when the parking
lights or headlights are on.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper System
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
the left side of the steering column. tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There 3
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
CAUTION!
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control continue to operate until you release the multifunction
is left in any position other than off. lever.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi- NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur spray the windshield with washer fluid.
when the vehicle is restarted. Windshield Washers
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
off position. If the windshield wiper control is (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off washer spray is desired.
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for Automatic Headlights Only)
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
the intermittent interval previously selected. approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are 3
and then turn off. turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
WARNING! and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
could lead to a collision. You might not see other further information.
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
windshield washer use. automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the NOTE:
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
may reduce rain sensor performance.
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
system. following conditions:
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
formation. outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
position, the automatic transmission shift lever is in upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is the steering column. 3
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
column in position, push the control handle up until fully to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
engaged. heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
WARNING!
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. the Uconnect® System.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
follow this warning may result in serious injury or Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
death. the heated steering wheel off.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

Controls Soft-Key Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. wheel covers of any type and material. This may
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, (40 km/h).
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
right side of the steering wheel.
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.

(Continued)
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired 3
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will illuminate. To
Electronic Speed Control Buttons turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET - time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL should be turned off when not in use.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For Premium Clusters Only
WARNING!
• When set to analog mode: The red outer line on the
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on speedometer changes from red to white to identify set
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally speed.
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always • When set to digital mode: The MPH reading turns
leave the system OFF when you are not using it. from white to red to identify set speed.

To Set A Desired Speed To Deactivate

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
and on level ground before pressing the SET button. erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and speed memory.
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: After pressing the OFF button a “Cruise Control
NOTE: After pressing the SET button “Cruise Control Off” message is displayed for five seconds or until
Set” message is displayed for five seconds or until another switch is pressed.
another switch is pressed.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
For Premium Clusters Only The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• When set to analog mode: The white outer line on the
speedometer returns to red. U.S. Speed (mph)
• When set to digital mode: The MPH reading returns • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
from red to white. increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the 3
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To Resume Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
continue to increase until the button is released, then
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
the new set speed will be established.
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed • Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
U.S. Speed (mph) continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the To Accelerate For Passing
button results in a decrease of 1 mph. Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the EQUIPPED
vehicle set speed. The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on 3
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sys-
moderate hills is normal.
tem Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so recommendations.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
Control.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve- position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. 10 mph (16 km/h).
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Sensors ParkSense® Display
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within will turn ON indicating the system status.
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in (150 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/ Park Assist Ready
bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. 3
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
Park Assist System Off
continuous.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

One-Half Second Tone Slow Tone

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

Slow Tone Fast Tone

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Fast Tone Fast Tone

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

Continuous Tone Continuous Tone

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING ALERTS
Rear Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
Distance than (200- (150- (120- (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) 79 in 150 cm) 120 cm) 100 cm) (30 cm)
(200 cm)
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime Tone center center center
(for rear only) only) only)
center
only)
Arc — Left None None None None None 2nd 1st Flashing
Rear Flashing
Arc — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st Flashing
Center Rear Flashing Flashing
Arc — None None None None None 2nd 1st Flashing
Right Rear Flashing
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the System
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Set- Assist system has detected a fault condition, the Elec-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a
further information. single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display 3
the “WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS”, “SER-
When the ParkSense® button is pushed to disable the
VICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or “SERVICE PARK
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS”, “SERVICE
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE PARK AS-
vehicle is in REVERSE.
SIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not
operate.
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “WIPE OFF REAR PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or “SERVICE
in the EVIC make sure the outer surface and the under- PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an
side of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, authorized dealer.
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.

Service Park Assist Sensors

Wipe Off Rear Park Assist Sensors

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display
the ⬙PARK ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLED⬙ message. If
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM DISABLED” appears in the
EVIC, cycle the ignition. If the message appears again,
see an authorized dealer.
3

Service Park Assist System

The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system will be auto-
matically disabled when there are faulted conditions
outside of the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system that
inhibit the feature from functioning properly. The Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a Park Assist System Disabled
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The ParkSense® System • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors. • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
NOTE: can result in the system not working properly. The
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication
other obstruction to keep the ParkSense® system operat- that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
ing properly. • Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
affect the performance of ParkSense®. 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the EVIC will display object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on the EVIC.
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
3
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity. can result in serious injury or death.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using • Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
using ParkSense®. result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
WARNING! sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
EQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has program-
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Un-
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau- derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of When the static grid lines have been programmed to turn on,
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. they will illustrate the width of the vehicle and will show
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear
vehicle above the rear License plate. of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- drive path. 3
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
must continue to pay attention while backing up. stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance

builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Touchscreen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Push the “More” soft-key.
3. Push the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Push the check box soft-key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights Front Map/Reading Lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
also be included, if equipped. can be turned on by pressing the lens.
To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close. 3

Front Map/Reading Lights

The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
is pressed.

Sunglass Bin Door

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.

HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
3
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- indicator flashes.
rity Alarm is active.
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located Training The Garage Door Opener
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 1 — Door Opener
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to 2 — Training Button
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
view.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 3
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button. 6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid. complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button Programming A Non-Rolling Code
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
follow these steps: before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while
Do not release the button. keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
steps. mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
and observe the indicator light. ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- remaining steps.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States 3
• To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT several seconds of transmission.
erase the channels.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
follow these steps: to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. time-out in the same manner.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
door or gate motor. up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
and observe the indicator light.
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
view. ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
fully trained. programming, plug it back in at this time.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button Security
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps: in your vehicle.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. 3
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all Troubleshooting Tips
remaining steps. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
Using HomeLink® here are some of the most common solutions:
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
remember to plug it back in?
time.
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
WARNING! (Continued)
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
WARNING! door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause assistance.
serious injury or death.
General Information
WARNING! This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
Your motorized door or gate will open and close two conditions:
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
(Continued)
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device. 3
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Power Sunroof Switch
visors on the overhead console.
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location object, to project through the sunroof opening.
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of Injury may result.
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in Opening Sunroof — Express
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
by the power sunroof while operating the power second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
serious injury or death. open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.

(Continued)
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
held rearward again. forward again. 3
Closing Sunroof — Express Pinch Protect Feature
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
the sunroof. release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override Sunshade Operation
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
the sunroof, attempt to remove the obstruction and then sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
press and hold the switch forward until the sunroof fully
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
closes.
open.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
Wind Buffeting
pressed.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
Venting Sunroof — Express
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
Press and release the Vent button within one half second ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED

The 12 Volt (13 Amp) instrument panel power outlet is 3
located on the lower instrument panel, below the climate
controls. The power outlet has power available when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. The
power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package). Instrument Panel Outlet
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
knob and element must be used.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Center Console Outlet
There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located in the center
console. This power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands. 3
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

CAUTION!
Underhood Fuses (Power Outlet Fuses)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
1 — F84 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
2 — F30 Fuse 20 A Yellow Center Console Outlet cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.

(Continued)
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, Front Seat Cupholders
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the The cupholders are located in the center console forward
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit- of the armrest between the front seats.
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.

Front Cupholders
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Rear Seat Cupholders STORAGE
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest Glove Compartment
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned for-
ward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows. open the glove compartment. 3

Rear Seat Cupholders Glove Compartment

292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest. In addition, the 12 Volt power outlet,
USB and Aux jack are located here.

Opened Glove Compartment

Console Features
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
Center Console
center console forward of the shift lever.
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision. 3
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.

Front Door Trim Storage

294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the
front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat
cushion loop to open the storage compartment.

Rear Door Trim Storage

Passenger Seat Cushion Loop

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.

WARNING! 3
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passen-
gers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped CARGO AREA FEATURES
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage Equipped
compartment.
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu-
ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.

Rear Armrest Storage

 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297

Rear Seatback Loops Folded Rear Seatback

After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
erly latched seat could cause serious injury. vehicle:
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
position) should not be used as a play area by • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
be seated and using the proper restraint system. the vehicle to sway.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats collision.
and use seat belts.
 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
Cargo Tie-Downs Ski Pass-Through
The rear cargo area is equipped with cargo tie-downs, There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
located on either side of the rear cargo area. seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door. 3

Cargo Tie-Downs

Ski Pass-Through
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
CAUTION!
Rear Window Defroster
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
The rear window defroster button is located on • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 soaking with warm water.
minutes. For an additional 15 minutes of operation, press • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
the button a second time. window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .304 ▫ Four Button EVIC — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .332
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .305 䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
ANALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
DIGITAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Uconnect® System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .352
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .308
䡵 Uconnect® 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 SiriusXM RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .323 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .367
▫ Two Button EVIC — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .325
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For ▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 ▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For ▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . .377 ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .378 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Operation Instructions — Universal ▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .386
Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .387
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
䡵 CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ CD Player Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . .380
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect®
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .390
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .380
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If ▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .401
▫ Uconnect® 8.4 Climate Controls — If
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395

4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Demister 5 — Glove Compartment 9 — Trunk Release

2 — Outlet 6 — Climate Control Hard Controls/ 10 — Hood Release
3 — Instrument Cluster Uconnect® System Hard Controls 11 — Dimmer Control
4 — Radio/Uconnect® System 7 — Power Outlet 12 — Headlight Switch
8 — Ignition Switch
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE

4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ANALOG
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM DIGITAL

4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
1. Tachometer equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
(RPM x 1000). Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
should be checked monthly when cold and overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
tires.) not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size, 4
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Turn Signal Indicators The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
for a defective outside light bulb. with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
4. Temperature Gauge
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that rized dealer for service.
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
WARNING!
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer diagnosed and corrected.
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
NOTE:
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC 4
System Pressure Cap paragraph. Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is placed
5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ in the ON/RUN.
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on previously.
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
position. It should go out with the engine sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on. 8. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for-
This light warns of an overheated engine condi- ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will 9. Seat Belt Reminder Light
sound.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
RUN position, this light will turn on for four to
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
minder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi- Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
10. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions,
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on it may
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
4
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
sary.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
WARNING!
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is position.
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System Light — If Equipped
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS trol (ESC) is off.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 12. Fuel Gauge
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is 13. Speedometer
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light Indicates vehicle speed.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
14. Power Steering System Warning is required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
This light is used to manage the electrical
may require towing. The light will come on when the
warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position and remain
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
Operating” for further information.
during starting, have the system checked by an authorized
15. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light dealer.
This light informs you of a problem with the 16. Air Bag Warning Light 4
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
problem is detected, the light will come on while
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light should
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running,
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light
further information.
is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped 20. Low Fuel Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly fuel is added.
until the vehicle is disarmed.
21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
18. Fuel Door Reminder
This indicator will illuminate when the park
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the lights or headlights are turned on.
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
22. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information
19. Electronic Speed Control Set Light Center (EVIC) Display
This light will turn on when the electronic Odometer Display
speed control has been set. The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
technician should leave the odometer reading the same “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must 23. Charging System Warning Light
be placed in the door jamb stating what the odometer This light shows the status of the electrical charg- 4
reading was before the repair or service. It is a good idea ing system. The light should turn on when the
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN and remain on
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
the odometer must be reset at zero. electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the auto- charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
matic transmission. local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
PARK. Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
24. Oil Pressure Warning Light the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
sound for four minutes when this light turns on. ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. 26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
25. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition trol systems. The light will illuminate when placing the
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and ignition in ON/RUN from the OFF position, before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it checked promptly.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
WARNING!
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
drive normally and will not require towing. operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
CAUTION! plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 4
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine 27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and Equipped
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur. This light indicates that the transmission fluid
Immediate service is required. temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
29. Electronic Speed Control Indicator
CAUTION!
• Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- This light will turn on when the electronic
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause speed control is ON. For further information,
severe transmission damage or transmission failure. refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
WARNING! • Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
If you continue operating the vehicle when the speed control is SET. For further information,
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi- refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire. 30. Amber Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Reconfigurable Telltales
28. Selectable EVIC Information
This area will show reconfigurable amber telltales (Low
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa- Fuel Telltale, Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator,
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc.). For Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale). For further
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped”. ter (EVIC)”.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
31. Red Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Reconfigurable Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales (Door(s)
Ajar, Oil Pressure Warning Telltale, Charging System
Telltale, Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale, Engine
Temperature Warning Telltale, Electric Power Steering
Malfunction). For further information, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”. 4
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
1 — EVIC Steering Wheel Controls
instrument cluster. 2 — EVIC Display
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The main display area will normally display the main • Unstored Messages
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages • Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
message takes control of the main display area for five
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long • Five Second Unstored Messages
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes-
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
message type is ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Engine Oil Change Indicator System Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Oil Change Required 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the within 10 seconds.
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change 4
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
OFF/LOCK position.
upon your personal driving style.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if not start the engine.)
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU but- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
lowing procedure.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The EVIC Menu Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the 2. Press and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.) downward through the main menu to “Vehicle
Info”.
2. Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve- 3. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
hicle Info”. access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button for one
3. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
second to access the ”Oil Life Reset” screen.
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
5. Press and hold the DOWN arrow button until the
4. Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button for one screen shows 100% oil life.
second to access the ”Oil Life Reset” screen.
6. Press and release the Up arrow button to exit the EVIC
5. Press and hold the DOWN arrow button until the screen.
screen shows 100% oil life.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
6. Press and release the Up arrow button to exit the EVIC start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
screen. reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Two Button EVIC — If Equipped • Units
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful • Language
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
The system allows the driver to select information by
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
• Odometer wheel:
• Digital Vehicle Speed
4
• Trip
• Range To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Current Fuel Economy
• Stored Messages
• Oil Life
• Settings
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Two–Button EVIC Controls)
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• UP Arrow Button • Key Fob Damaged
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll • Key In Ignition
upward through the main menus (Odometer,
• Left Turn Signal Out
Digital Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Range To
Empty, Average Fuel Economy, Current Fuel • Right Turn Signal Out
Economy, Stored Messages, Settings).
• Turn Signal On
• RIGHT Arrow Button
• Lights On
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
• Low Beam Headlight Out
access the sub-menu screens of a main menu
item. Press and hold the RIGHT arrow button • High Beam Headlight Out
for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
• License Plate Light Out
features that can be reset.
• Backup Light Out
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages • Brake Light Out
• Key Fob Battery Low • Parking Light Out
• Wrong Key Fob • Service Air Bag System
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Service Air Bag Warning Light • Oil Temperature Hot
• Washer Fluid Low • Check Fuel Cap
• Parking Brake Engaged • Oil Change Due
• Brake Fluid Low • Service Tire Pressure System
• Service Electronic Braking System • Inflate Tire to XX
• Engine Temperature Hot • Coolant Low 4
• Battery Voltage Low • Rain Sensor Fail
• Oil Pressure Low • Traction Control Off
• Fuel Low • Engine Warming Wait To Start
• Service Antilock Brake System • Too Cold Plug In Heater
• Service Electronic Throttle Control • Cruise Off
• Transmission Too Hot • Cruise Ready
• Service Power Steering • Cruise Set To XXX MPH
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Cruise Set To XXX km/h • Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled • Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled EVIC Main Menu
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled To step to each main menu feature press and release the
UP button once for each step. A step from the last item in
• Door Open the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be
• Doors Open displayed. The following features are in the main menu:
• Trunk Open • Odometer
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low • Digital Vehicle Speed
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset • Trip
• Remote Start Active Key To Run • Range To Empty
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open • Average Fuel Economy
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open • Current Fuel Economy
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired • Stored Messages
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Oil Life Press the UP buttons to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
• Settings
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
• Units
tion:
• Language
Trip A
NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
Fuel Economy), the EVIC prompts a reset with a RIGHT
reset. 4
arrow button graphic and the word RESET next to it.
Trip B
Trip Info
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Press and release the UP arrow button until the Trip Info
reset.
icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip Elapsed Time
features in the next screen: Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
• Trip A Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Resetting A Trip Info Function When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the RTE display will change
To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
function you want to reset using the UP button. Push the
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
RIGHT arrow button until the feature displays zero.
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
Range To Empty (RTE) LOW FUEL text and a new RTE value will display.
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with Average Fuel Economy
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
last reset. When Average Fuel Economy is selected, The
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
word “RESET>” (with right arrow) appears next to it.
tank level. RTE cannot be reset.
Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Economy which displays “0” immediately after reset.
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Then, the history information will be erased, and the
the vehicle, regardless of the RTE display value. averaging will continue from the last fuel average read-
ing before the reset.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Tire PSI Stored Messages
Press and release the UP button until ⬙Tire Pressure⬙ is
displayed. When a stored warning message is present, this
icon is displayed in the lower left side of the
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
Tire Pressure menu. This feature shows the
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle graphic is number of stored warning messages. Pressing
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
the graphic. stored messages are. 4
• If one or more tires have low pressure, Inflate Tire To Settings — EVIC Units And Language Selection
XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
pressure values in each corner of the graphic. Tire Average and Current Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty
pressure values that are too low will be flashing. and Tire Pressure features. Press and Release the RIGHT
• If the Tire Pressure System requires service, ⬙Service arrow button to toggle units between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC⬙.
TPM System⬙ is displayed. Tire Pressure is an informa- Press the UP arrow button until the Language is dis-
tion only function and cannot be reset. played, then press the Right arrow button to select
English, Francais, or Espanol depending on availability.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Four Button EVIC — If Equipped – Oil Temperature
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful – Oil Life
information by pressing the switches mounted on the • Stored Warning Messages
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
The system allows the driver to select information by
• Radio Info pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
• Fuel Economy Info wheel:

• Screen Setup
• Digital Vehicle Speed
• Analog Vehicle Speed
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Vehicle Info
– Tire Pressure
– Coolant Temperature
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Four–Button EVIC Controls)
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• UP Arrow Button • RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
upward through the main menu and sub- access the information screens or sub-menu
menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stored screens of a main menu item. Press and hold
Messages, Screen Set Up). the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
• DOWN Arrow Button reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• LEFT Arrow Button 4
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, main menu from an info screen or sub-menu
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up). item.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) 1 — Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph)
Displays
2 — Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
cluster and consists of the follow sections: non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and white
for on demand information.
3 — Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
4 — Menu Titles / Odometer
5 — Menu Set (Selectable Icons)
6 — Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
7 — Reconfigurable Telltales
9 — Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are
sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menus
is shown here.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) • Service Power Steering
Messages
• Cruise Off
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Cruise Ready
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to XX”
• Service Airbag System 4
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Traction Control Off
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Washer Fluid Low
• Brake Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Oil Change Due
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Fuel Low
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Right Turn Signal Light Out • Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Left Turn Signal Light Out • Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Turn Signal On • Service Airbag System
• Vehicle Not In Park • Service Airbag Warning Light
• Key In Ignition • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Key In Ignition Lights On • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Key to Run • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button • Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low • Doors Open
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold • Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open • Gear Not Available
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open • Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open • Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required EVIC Amber Telltales
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req. This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Low Fuel Telltale
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
• Service Transmission fuel is added. 4
• Service Shifter • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low • Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale — If
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the Equipped
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the This telltale indicates that the transmission
middle, and red telltales on the left. fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and stop the EVIC Red Telltales
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off. telltales include:

CAUTION! • Door Ajar

This telltale turns on when one or more doors
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are
ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually
ajar.
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure. • Oil Pressure Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
WARNING! the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, when this light turns on.
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to • Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
components and cause a fire. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Charging System Telltale • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale
This telltale shows the status of the electrical This telltale informs you of a problem with the
charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non- telltale comes on while driving, have the sys-
essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at tem checked by an authorized dealer.
idle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means
• If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on while
that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the 4
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
an authorized dealer.
placed in the PARK position. The telltale should turn off.
• If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
• If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, your
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the
telltale is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required. You may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall
and your vehicle may require towing.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Engine Temperature Warning Telltale EVIC White Telltales
This telltale warns of an overheated engine con- • Electronic Speed Control ON
dition. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap- This telltale will illuminate amber when the
proaches H, this telltale will illuminate and a single electronic speed control is ON. For further infor-
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. mation, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in
• If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it EVIC Green Telltales
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not • Electronic Speed Control SET
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and This telltale will illuminate green when the elec-
call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in tronic speed control is SET. For further informa-
“What To Do In Emergencies” for more information. tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

This telltale is on when the Electric Power

Steering is not operating and needs service.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Full Speedometer Analog Or Digital Display Vehicle Speed MPH / Km/h
Selection
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
Full Speedometer Analog Icon button until the Vehicle Speed icon is high-
lighted in the EVIC. Press the RIGHT arrow
button to view a digital display of the current
Full Speedometer Digital Icon speed in MPH or km/h. Pressing the RIGHT arrow
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure 4
between mph or km/h. Press the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Analog or Digital display icon is highlighted in the NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
change the display between analog and digital. EVIC.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) • If one or more tires have low pressure, ⬙Inflate Tire To XX⬙
is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
tire pressure value.
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis- • If the Tire Pressure system requires service, ⬙Service
played. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button to scroll Tire Pressure System⬙ is displayed.
through the following information sub-menus:
Tire Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
⬙Tire Pressure⬙ is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.

Tire Pressure Analog Display

 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Fuel Economy
4
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is high-
lighted. Press the RIGHT arrow button and the
next screen will display the following:
Fuel Economy Analog Display
• Average Fuel Economy
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Current Fuel Economy
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Fuel Economy Digital Display Fuel Economy MPG Flower Analog Display
The EVIC has the capability of displaying an interactive
flower through the Fuel Economy sub-menu which will
add one flower pedal for every 2.5 Miles Per Gallon
(MPG) (1.06 km per liter (km/l) increment. Once the
vehicle reached 30 MPG the EVIC will display a full
flower.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel
Economy which displays “0” immediately after reset.
Then, the history information will be erased, and the
averaging will continue from the last fuel average read-
ing before the reset.
Range To Empty (RTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with 4
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. RTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT arrow
Fuel Economy MPG Flower Digital Display button.
Average Fuel Economy
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
This feature shows the average fuel economy since the loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
last reset. When Average Fuel Economy is selected, The the vehicle, regardless of the RTE displayed value.
word “RESET>” (with right arrow) appears next to it.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) Trip Info
estimated driving distance, the RTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant button until the Trip Info icon is highlighted in
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow
FUEL” message and a new RTE value will display. Press button to display the following three trip fea-
the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu. tures in the next screen:
Current/Instantaneous Fuel Economy
• Trip A
The feature displays instantaneous fuel economy in a bar
• Trip B
graph below the RTE, this function cannot be reset. Press
the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu. • Elapsed Time
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

Trip Info Analog Display Trip Info Digital Display

Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions or press the LEFT arrow button
to return to the main menu.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa- Resetting A Trip Info Function
tion: To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
Trip A function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN
buttons. Press the RIGHT arrow button until the feature
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
displays zero.
reset.
Stored Messages
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
reset.
button until the Messages display icon is high-
Elapsed Time lighted in the EVIC. This feature shows the
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. number of stored warning messages. Pressing
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
ON/RUN position. stored messages are. Press the LEFT arrow button to
return to the Main Menu.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Screen Setup Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the
Screen Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change the location that information is displayed
Screen Setup Display Analog Icon
within the instrument cluster. Use the UP and DOWN
buttons to highlight a screen setup location (i.e., Upper
Left, Upper Right, etc.) then press the RIGHT arrow
Screen Setup Display Digital Icon button to select the location and make changes. Press the
UP and DOWN buttons to select the information you 4
would like to display in that location (i.e., Date, Time,
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Outside Temp, etc.) and press the RIGHT arrow button to
the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC. save the display setting. You can press the LEFT arrow
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the button at any time to back out of a sub-menu selection.
Screen Setup sub-menu. The Screen Setup feature allows NOTE: The Screen Setup items are only available at
you to change what information is displayed in the speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). All other menu items
instrument cluster as well as the location that information are not active when in Screen Setup. If the vehicle is
is displayed. shifted into gear, this feature is locked out and the main
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until screen will display “Screen Setup Unavailable While In
the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Motion”.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Time
• Speedometer Range To Empty (RTE)
Analog 1 Average MPG
Analog 2 Current MPG
Digital 1 (default setting) Trip A
Digital 2 Trip B
• Gear Display • Upper Right
Standard (PRND –/+) (default setting) None
Single Character (D) Compass (default setting)
Word (Drive) Outside Temp
• Upper Left Time
None Range To Empty (RTE)
Compass Average MPG
Outside Temp (default setting) Current MPG
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Trip A • Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To
Default Settings)
Trip B
• Lower Left Cancel

None (default setting) Okay

Compass Uconnect® SETTINGS

Outside Temp The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and 4
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
Time
that allows you to access and change the customer
• Lower Right programmable features.
None (default setting) Hard-Keys
Compass Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
Outside Temp the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Time
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the time.
control knob one or more times to select or change a When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the
setting (i.e., ON, OFF). desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and
Soft-Keys release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® Touchscreen.
lected.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow
System 8.4 Settings soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the X
Press the More soft-key, then press the Settings soft-key soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock, available settings.
Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,
Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS
Setup.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Display • Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may select the brightness with
will be available. the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
• Display Mode setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow
When in this display you may select one of the auto soft-key.
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the • Set Language 4
back arrow soft-key. When in this display, you may select one of three
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
soft-key.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Units • Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC, When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting, check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. to return to the previous menu.
• Voice Response Length • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a designated turn within a programmed route. To make
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
to return to the previous menu. setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Clock • Set Time Minutes
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
will be available. “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
• Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow
When in this display, you may automatically have the soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
setting touch the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a 4
check-mark appears next to the setting, indicating that • Time Format
the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow When in this display, you may select the time format
soft-key to return to the previous menu. display setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a
• Set Time Hours check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X” digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Status setting touch the “Show Time in Status Bar”
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting, • Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Safety & Driving Assistance Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
After pressing the Safety/Assistance soft-key the follow-
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
ing settings will be available.
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
• Park Assist — If Equipped mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE- audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or back arrow soft-key.
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the back arrow
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-
tem function and operating information.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
in the BSM not operating to specification.
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
• ParkView® Backup Camera back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
4
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Lights
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift
lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on will be available.
the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to • Interior Ambient Lights
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView®
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear the brightness of the interior ambient lighting. To change
License plate. To make your selection, touch the ParkView® the Interior Ambient Lights setting, touch the + or -
Backup Camera soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to soft-key to select your desired Interior Ambient Light
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the level. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. previous menu.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Interior Accent Lighting • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the interior accent lighting When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in
surrounding the instrument panel will illuminate. To the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
make your selection, touch the Interior Accent Lighting mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
• Headlight Illumination On Approach been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate previous menu.
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors • Auto Dim High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If Equipped
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will
deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
your selection, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until a
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
previous menu.
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• Daytime Running Lights Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, settings will be available.
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a • Auto Unlock On Exit
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
return to the previous menu. the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK
or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To 4
• Flash Lights With Lock make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote cating that the setting has been selected. Touch the back
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lamps
with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Flash Lights With Lock • Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until a check- check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to to return to the previous menu.
return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
• Sound Horn With Lock
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a check- 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
return to the previous menu. is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door • Interior Motion Detection Alarm
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro- This feature will sound the vehicles alarm when motion
grammed touching the handle more than once will only is detected inside the vehicle while locked. To make your
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is selection, touch the Interior Motion Detection Alarm 4
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
use RKE transmitter). back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Passive Entry Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry soft-key the following settings will be available.
(RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your
selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Horn With Remote Start Engine Off Options
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol-
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, lowing settings will be available.
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a • Engine Off Power Delay
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to When this feature is selected, the power window
return to the previous menu. switches, radio, Uconnect® system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
Vehicle Start — If Equipped after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when Power Delay status touch the “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,⬙
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). To make your “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” soft-key. Then touch the
selection, touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key, until a back arrow soft-key.
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• Headlight Off Delay NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Delay status touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
4
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences
the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is
driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass
will automatically compensate for the differences, and pro-
vide the most accurate compass heading.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Perform Compass Calibration • Equalizer
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also soft-key.
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
directly on the desired setting.
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally. • Speed Adjusted Volume
Audio This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the back
will be available.
arrow soft-key.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
• Music Info Cleanup SiriusXM Setup
This feature helps organize music files for optimized music After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” soft-key the following
navigation. To make your selection, touch the Music Info settings will be available.
Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the • Channel Skip
back arrow soft-key.
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make 4
make your selection, touch the Surround Sound soft-key, your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing
soft-key. the back arrow soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available.
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Subscription Information Uconnect® 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
RADIO
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re-
subscribe.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Sub-
scription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Uconnect® 200
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode SEEK Buttons
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for
ACC position to operate the radio. the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the
right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the until you make another selection. Holding either but-
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a ton will bypass stations without stopping until you
second time to turn off the radio. release it. 4
Electronic Volume Control TIME Button
The electronic volume control turns continuously Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn- and radio frequency.
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
Clock Setting Procedure
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours are
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
highlighted.
set at the same volume level as last played.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side ENTER/ INFO Button
BROWSE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
will highlight. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
SCROLL control knob. RW/FF
5. To exit, press the TIME button or press the BACK Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
button to return to the previous menu. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
The clock can also be set by pressing the MENU button. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the AM or FM frequencies.
MENU button until CLOCK appears in the display. TUNE Control
Using the ENTER/BROWSE button select SET TIME,
and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
NOTE: Time format has the options of 12HR or 24HR.
Selecting one of these options will change the way the
clock is displayed.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Setting The Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance Or Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a second time and
Fade MID RANGE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
To set the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade
settings press the AUDIO button to access the Audio decrease the mid-range tones.
sub-menu. Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
The Audio sub-menu can also be reached by pressing the
MENU button until AUDIO appears in the display. Press knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to de- 4
crease the treble tones.
the ENTER/BROWSE button to select the AUDIO menu
and use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight select Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a fourth time and
Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade. Once the BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL con-
desired selection is highlighted, press the ENTER/ trol knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
BROWSE button to select the item and use the TUNE/ sound level from the Left or Right side speakers.
SCROLL knob to adjust the setting.
Press the ENTER/BROWSE button a fifth time and FADE
Press the ENTER/BROWSE button and BASS will dis- will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
play. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the bass tones. between the front and rear speakers.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the BACK button to exit Bass, Mid Range, Treble, BROWSE button to set the minutes. The minutes will
Balance or Fade. highlight. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the ENTER/BROWSE but-
MENU Button ton to save time change.
Pressing the MENU button allows you to scroll between
Player Mode
the setting sub-menus. Once the desired sub-menu setting
is highlighted press the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the • Player Browse — Selecting Player Browse will go to
setting. The following items are selectable: the appropriate browse menu depending on the device
Radio Mode currently playing (will function the same as pressing
the browse button while in that mode). This will only
• Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow you appear in the menu if the device currently playing can
to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade, support these features.
just like pressing the Audio hard control. If the BACK
button is pressed the radio will return to the Main Menu. • Shuffle (SHFL) — This function shuffles (randomizes
the order of the files). This will only appear in the
• Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the clock. menu if the device currently playing can support these
Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control features.
knob. After adjusting the hours, press the ENTER/
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
• Repeat (RPT) — When Repeat is activated, the cur- ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The min-
rently playing song will begin again when it ends. It utes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the right
will continue to cycle through the same song until side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the ENTER/
repeat is turned Off. Repeat will be turned off once one BROWSE button to save time change.
for the following conditions are met: 1) The source is
System Info
ejected 2) A different track list within that source is
initiated 3) The REPEAT button is toggled OFF. This • Selecting System Info will display the software ver-
will only appear in the menu if the device currently sion, serial number and SIRIUS ID. 4
playing can support these features.
RADIO Button
• Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow you Press the button to select either AM, FM and Satellite
to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade, mode if equipped.
just like pressing the Audio hard control. If the BACK
button is pressed the radio will return to the Main Buttons 1 - 5
Menu. These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
• Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the commit to pushbutton memory AM (A, B, C), FM
clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL (A, B, C) and Satellite — 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT
control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the stations.
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Set The Pushbutton Memory Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
When you are receiving a station that you wish to MP3 Audio Play
commit to pushbutton memory, press and hold the NOTE:
button (1–5) you wish to lock onto this station for three
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
seconds.
position to operate the radio.
You may add a second or third station to each pushbut-
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
ton by repeating the above procedure with this exception:
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Press the A–B–C button to select the A, B or C mode. Each
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
button can be set for up to 3 stations in AM, FM and Sat.
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
This allows a total of 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations
to be stored into pushbutton memory. Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Player Button Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Pressing the Player button will allow you to switch from label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
AM/FM modes to Player mode (CD, USB/iPOD®, AUX, the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Bluetooth®). radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
SEEK Button
CAUTION! Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning 4
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
player mechanism. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button Shuffle and Repeat cannot be active at the same time. If
one is selected while the other is currently active the
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
currently active one will be changed to OFF. These
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
settings will be dependent of the current source. If shuffle
RW/FF is on in iPod®, moving to CD will not have shuffle On
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will unless it was previously set to On.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button domly selected track.
works in a similar manner.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Shuffle (SHFL) And Repeat (RPT)
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in file recording media and formats are limited. When
random order to provide an interesting change of pace. writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
Press the MENU button to display the Player menu. Use tions.
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to scroll to the Shuffle or
Repeat sub-menu. Once the Shuffle or Repeat sub-menu Supported Media (Disc Types)
setting is highlighted press the ENTER/BROWSE button The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
to select the setting and turn it on or off. CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA and CDDA+MP3.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. character extension)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- character extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal 4
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8 Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255 writing⬙ are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file in longer disc loading times.
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of
files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display
the file name and folder name, and will assign a number
instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20
folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding
50 folders will result in this display.)
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats Sampling
MPEG
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Frequency Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 (kHz)
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will Layer 3 192, 160, 128,
not play the file. 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files 56, 48, 40, 32,
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or 24, 16, 8
VBR bit rates. ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Playback Of MP3 Files Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Pressing the Enter/Browse button will bring up a list of
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is
done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Se-
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files. lecting a folder by pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button
will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following: 4
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
before writing to the disc. more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display. (USB)
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode The USB audio input allows the user to plug in a flash
drive and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to
source and play through the vehicle speakers. USB when an iPod® or external USB drive is connected.
Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to Pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button while in USB
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. mode will bring up a list of available categories within
NOTE: the USB. The categories will consist of: Playlists, Artist,
Album, Genre, Audiobooks, Podcasts and all Songs..
• The head unit will have no control of the AUX device. You
Browsing through the categories will function the same
can only control the volume on the head unit. No infor-
mation about the song will be displayed. as iPod® browse. USB will not have folder browsing.

• The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s If the USB connected does not have any audio files and
volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not the user selects USB as the device to play audio the screen
loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX will display, “No audio files found.” This messaged is to
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down be displayed for all devices that do not have audio files
and radio volume up. when connected and selected.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Security
If this radio is installed in a vehicle that does not have a
matching Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) an Secu-
rity code will need to be entered by the dealer.

CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED
The single disc CD player is located in the center console.
4
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
before the CD player will operate.
• The CD Player is part of the radio for the CD Player
Uconnect® 200.
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player Operating Instructions Uconnect® — If Equipped
Loading If equipped with Uconnect® 8.4, refer to the Uconnect®
8.4 manual for further information.
To insert disc into the player, follow the instructions
shown: iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect®
1. Gently insert the disc with the label facing the rear of VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
the vehicle while the light below the loading slot is This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
illuminated. The disc will automatically be pulled into plugged into the USB port.
the CD player.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
2. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
light below the loading slot will turn off. may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
EJECT (EJT) Button visit Apple’s website for software updates.

If there is a disc in the CD player, press the EJT button If equipped with Uconnect® 8.4, refer to the Uconnect®
and the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc User’s Manual for further details on iPod®, USB, and
within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. MP3 usage.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port Cable Routing

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The center console will have a position where the Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
routed through without damaging the cable when clos-
Using This Feature
ing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable connect to the USB port:
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is • The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
not available in the center console base, route the cable system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the etc.) information on the radio display.
lid to close without damaging the cable.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), • The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
pressing radio switches, as described below. audio device).
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
Using Radio Buttons playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙
To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/ VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system. holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW 4
button long enough will jump to the beginning of the
Play Mode
current track.
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
holding the FF>> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
USB device and display data: jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec-
onds.
• Use the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the next
or previous track.
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Use the << SEEK button during play mode to jump to • Press the SHUFFLE button to play the selections on
the start of the current track. Pressing the SEEK>> the USB/iPod® device in random order to provide an
button during play mode will jump to the next track in interesting change of pace. To stop Shuffle Mode, press
the list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or the SHUFFLE button again. To turn SHUFFLE On/Off
Previous Track.⬙ with Voice Commands, press the button, wait for
the beep, and say “Shuffle On” or “Shuffle Off.”
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) List Or Browse Mode
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all below, will bring up Browse mode. List mode enables
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. audio device.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
In Browse mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as • Browse button: The Browse button will display the top
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Press and
USB device. then turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to list the
top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNE/
• Preset 1 – Playlists SCROLL control knob to select. This will display the next
• Preset 2 – Artists sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the
same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all
• Preset 3 – Albums iPod® or external USB device sub-menu levels are avail-
able on this system.
4
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks • A-B-C button: For all player devices, pressing the A-B-C
button while browsing will present an ABC jump feature.
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list The system will show the available first letters of the item
on the top line and the first item in that list on the being browsed. If letters do not have items they will not
second line. be shown, “_” will be shown in their place. After selecting
a letter you will be taken to the first item of that letter
• To exit Browse mode without making a selection, press within the entire list. When a browse subcategory is
the same PRESET button again to go back to Play selected and contains no contents, “No items found” will
mode. be displayed on the screen. This message times out after
three seconds, and will take you back to the submenu you
were previously in.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
CAUTION!
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any Uconnect® phone system.
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-
treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam- Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
guidelines. radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Stream-
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device, ing Audio.”
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device Play Mode
and/or to the connectors. When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
WARNING! some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
could result in an accident. and played.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Selecting A Different Audio Device Previous Track
1. Press the PHONE button to begin. Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
previous music track on your cellular phone.
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
Browse
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices. Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is 4
Next Track playing will display info.
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
track on your cellular phone. The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and The button located in the center of the left-hand control
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
CD Player CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once precautions:
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
surface.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the 4
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. wiping from center to edge.

The center button on the left side rocker switch has no 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a ing the disc.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
center button will select the next available CD in the or anti-static sprays.
player.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular CLIMATE CONTROLS
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat- The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known system can be operated through either the controls on the
good disc before considering disc player service. instrument panel or through the Uconnect® 8.4 system
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES display if equipped.

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in When the Uconnect® 8.4 system is in different modes
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and pas-
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is the display.
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the Equipped
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
not using Uconnect® (if equipped). outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
2. Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporar-
ily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will
cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.
NOTE: 4
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Manual Climate Controls — Hard-Keys • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
1. Blower Control weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from • The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fog-
the “O” (OFF) position. There are seven blower speeds. ging when the recirculation button is pressed and the
mode control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
the Recirculation button is pressed while in this than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
mode, the LED indicator will flash several times then located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
is this mode is selected. the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection. reducing air conditioning performance.
4. Air Conditioning Control
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled. Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
3. Temperature Control will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tempera-
tures, while rotating right into the red area indicates NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
warmer temperatures. until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
• MAX A/C • Panel
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
buttons at the same time. ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
• ECONOMY MODE airflow.
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
Then, move the temperature control to the desired for maximum airflow to the rear.
temperature and select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
• Bi-Level
4
modes.
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
5. Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
distribution. You can select either a primary mode as is a difference in temperature between the upper and
identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive cool conditions.
from that mode.
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Floor air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy,
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a use these modes only when necessary.
small amount flowing through the defrost and 6. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
side window demist outlets.
• Mix Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
window demist outlets. This setting works best in tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining turns off after approximately 15 minutes. For an addi-
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. tional 15 minutes of operation, press the button a second
time.
• Front Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side window NOTE:
demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and • You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
temperature settings for best windshield and side win- by pressing the rear window defroster switch a
dow defrosting. second time.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, • To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air Condi- window defroster only when the engine is operating.
tioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Uconnect® 8.4 Climate Controls — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Hard-Keys
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements: The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect® 8.4
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear screen, in the center of the instrument panel.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the 4
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-Keys

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys
And Soft-keys)
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® 8.4 system
screen. 1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the automatic opera-
tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator
will turn off.
2. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
3. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — forced through the climate system. There are seven
Soft-Keys blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The 4. Front Defrost Button
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
as follows:
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
Hard-key ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
The blower speed increases as you turn the control to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting. 4
Soft-key
5. Rear Defrost Button
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
area between the icons. An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
CAUTION!
automatically exit Sync.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to 7. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear Provides the passenger with independent temperature
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the automatically exit Sync.
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water. 8. Climate Control OFF Button
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
window cleaners on the interior surface of the ON/OFF.
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 9. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
6. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Provides the passenger with independent temperature this function will cause the ATC to switch between
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set- manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
tings. Operation” for more information.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
10. Driver Temperature Control Down Button 12. Modes
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
as follows:
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time. • Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
11. Driver Temperature Control Up Button Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
4
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings. outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or
side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same amount of airflow from these outlets.
time. • Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- 13. SYNC
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
warmer air from the floor outlets.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
• Floor Mode enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
of air is directed through the defrost and side Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
window demister outlets. Sync will automatically exit this feature.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window Climate Control Functions
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or A/C (Air Conditioning)
snowy conditions.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
• Defrost Mode to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
and defogging. When the defrost mode is selected, the button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
blower level may increase. adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
NOTE: NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
may be unavailable (soft-key button greyed out). The
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from in the control button to blink and then turn off. 4
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. Automatic Operation
Recirculation 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-
Recirculation control button. The recirculation perature hard or soft control buttons (7, 8, 13, 14). Once
indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
and allow outside air into the vehicle.
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is Manual Operation Override
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
system to function automatically. trol.
NOTE: The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
comfort as quickly as possible. circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
this section of the manual. selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic Operating Tips
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
tions.
 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Summer Operation Vacation Storage
The engine cooling system must be protected with a Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your 4
Window Fogging
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
Winter Operation moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
is not recommended because it may cause window windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
fogging. dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: A/C Air Filter
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long The climate control system filters outside air containing
periods, as fogging may occur. dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or instructions.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
 STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .414
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .409 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .414
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .410 ▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 5
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C) . .412
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .420
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (1.4L Turbo
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Engine Only — DDCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped . . .413
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .446
(2.0L And 2.4L Engine Only — 6F24) . . . . . . . .430
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .461
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .464
 STARTING AND OPERATING 407
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .468 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .482
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .471
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 5
▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .494
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .481
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .515
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
 STARTING AND OPERATING 409
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
access to an unlocked vehicle. lever in NEUTRAL. 5
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is NOTE:
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- • The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
dren should be warned not to touch the parking pressed to the floor.
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve
in a location accessible to children), and do not pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with key.
(Continued)
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Normal Starting
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
out of PARK.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
of a button, as long as the Remote the engine starting, press the button again.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
the passenger compartment. is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 411
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
START/STOP Button (engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK, then press
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
3. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK, the Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two NEUTRAL Position)
seconds or three short presses in a row with the The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN 5
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain and START. To change the ignition positions without
in the ACC position until the shift lever/shift selector starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF steps:
position. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed • Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC will display
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK “ACC”),
position, or it could roll.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time Extended Park Starting
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC will
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
display “ON/RUN”),
has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC will
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
display “OFF”).
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)
when the engine starts.
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions
an externally powered electric block heater (available 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place the
from your authorized dealer) is required for the 1.4L ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
below -29°F (-34°C) and is recommended for the 2.0L Extended Park Starting procedure.
engine and 2.4L engine below -20°F (-29°C). 4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 413
If Engine Fails To Start
CAUTION!
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce- To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
dures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess
After Starting
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key
in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. warms up.
5
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
WARNING!
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
serious personal injury. shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a WARNING!
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a You or others could be injured if you leave the
grounded, three-wire extension cord. vehicle unattended without having the parking
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
electrical cord could cause electrocution. pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.

NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-

creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Shifting Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
pedal. listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position. loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
All Engines Engine Speeds 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 5
Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
Downshifting provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
416 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their clutch damage are significantly lower.
grip, and the vehicle could skid. • Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal
CAUTION! is pressed.
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at • Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and depressed could result in clutch damage
clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the
clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing
CAUTION!
the clutch may result in engine damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch dam- and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
age, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case pedal is pressed.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 417

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
Speed
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift CAUTION!
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- 5
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
ing precautions are not observed:
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting a complete stop.
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
is held pressed (i.e., not released). has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.

(Continued)
418 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. hicle against unwanted movement.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
is firmly pressing the brake pedal. if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
shifting out of PARK. verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
WARNING! the engine is idling normally and your foot is
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure firmly pressing the brake pedal.
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is Fob and lock your vehicle.
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, (Continued)
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Key Ignition Park Interlock
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF
number of reasons. A child or others could be (key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed
seriously or fatally injured. from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF
• Children should be warned not to touch the park- position, and the transmission is locked in PARK when-
ing brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. ever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the 5
in a location accessible to children), and do not key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
mode. A child could operate power windows, other obtain service.
controls, or move the vehicle.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
hundred miles (kilometers).
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (1.4L Turbo
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
Engine Only — DDCT)
shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear position display (located in the
This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting
instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear
from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if
range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety
button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of
feature helps protect your transmission from damage.
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem” in this section). To drive, press the lock button on The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
 STARTING AND OPERATING 421
(refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further informa- Gear Ranges
tion). Moving the shift lever rearward (+) or forward (-) DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
while in the AutoStick® position (beside the DRIVE NEUTRAL into another gear range.
position) will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
1, 2, 3, etc. allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the 5
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
Shift Lever
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
WARNING! (Continued)
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau- if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
WARNING! someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the firmly pressing the brake pedal.
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move- those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
ment and possible injury or damage. you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 423

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve- • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
hicle against unwanted movement. turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake
Fob and lock your vehicle. pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with result.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
number of reasons. A child or others could be damage the drivetrain. 5
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
or the shift lever. have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or • When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
in a location accessible to children) and do not all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
CAUTION!
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
stop. reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
NEUTRAL (N) Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
periods with the engine running. The engine may be for further information.
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
DRIVE (D)
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
WARNING! driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
practices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 425
To maximize fuel economy, the Dual Dry Clutch auto- • When stopped on an incline, always hold the vehicle
matic transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar in place using the brakes. On steep inclines, Hill Start
to a manual transmission. Therefore, you should become Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the car in position
familiar with some of the normal operational character- when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator
istics of the DDCT: pedal is not applied after a short time, the car will roll
back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or
• During low-speed driving conditions in first gear,
press the accelerator to climb the hill.
vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in
response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This • Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a
behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise
with a manual transmission. is normal and will not damage the transmission. 5
• At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
to a manual transmission as the transmission changes when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
gears. These noises are normal and will not damage tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
the transmission. winds), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section for further information) to
• Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
odor similar to a manual transmission. An active
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
warning message will display in the Instrument Clus-
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
ter if cool down actions are needed.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures, the transmission Instrument Cluster Messages
will not operate if the oil temperature is -22°F (-30°C) or
Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to
below. Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmis- alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur.
sion in PARK in order to warm the fluid. Normal
These messages are described below.
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
GEAR NOT AVAILABLE In AutoStick® mode, the gear selected by the driver is not available due
to a fault condition. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
SHIFT NOT ALLOWED The gear position requested by the driver is currently blocked. This oc-
curs if: REVERSE is requested while moving (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or
faster), if DRIVE is requested while moving backwards (at 6 mph
[10 km/h] or faster), or if (in AutoStick® mode) a DOWNSHIFT is re-
quested while in 1st gear, 3rd gear or higher is requested at a stop, or a
requested shift would cause engine lugging or overspeed. Make sure the
vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 427

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL – The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL (due to a fault
THEN D or R condition, or overheat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE
with the brakes released), but the shift lever remains in gear. Shift into
NEUTRAL and then back into gear for continued driving. If the
transmission will not re-engage, see your authorized dealer.
AUTOSTICK NOT AVAILABLE AutoStick® mode is unavailable due to a shift lever fault. See your
authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
AUTOMATIC MODE NOT The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically, due to a fault 5
AVAILABLE condition. Use the AutoStick® mode to shift the transmission manually.
See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
REDUCE GEAR CHANGES The transmission pump is overheating. In AutoStick® mode, try to drive
in one specific gear as much as possible, avoiding frequent gear changes.
In DRIVE, the transmission will automatically modify its shift schedule
to reduce the number of shifts.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
TRANS. GETTING HOT PRESS The transmission driving clutch is overheating, usually due to repeated
BRAKE launches in stop-and-go traffic. Pull over and allow the transmission to
cool in NEUTRAL until “TRANS. COOL READY TO DRIVE” is
displayed.
TRANS. HOT STOP SAFELY The transmission driving clutch has overheated. Pull over and shift the
SHIFT TO P transmission into PARK and allow the vehicle to cool until “TRANS.
COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION A transmission fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for
diagnosis and service.
SERVICE SHIFTER A shift lever fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for
diagnosis and service.
ENGAGE PARK BRAKE The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning properly.
Engage the parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll when in
PARK.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Transmission Limp Home Mode 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 5. Restart the engine.
Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and operation.
Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th
[with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
to be available. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your 5
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
damaging the transmission. recur.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (2.0L And Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
2.4L Engine Only — 6F24) accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear shifting between these gears.
range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® shift positions. Manual
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys- shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control
tem” in this section). To drive, press the lock button on (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further informa-
the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from tion). Moving the shift lever rearward (+) or forward (-)
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. while in the AutoStick® position (beside the DRIVE
position) will manually select the transmission gear, and
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
1, 2, 3, etc.
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
 STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Gear Ranges When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the
NEUTRAL into another gear range. transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution,
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P) WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
5
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the ment and possible injury or damage.
vehicle in this range. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
brake. PARK before leaving the vehicle.

(Continued)
432 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your Fob and lock your vehicle.
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is number of reasons. A child or others could be
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
brake pedal. warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure or the shift lever.
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is in a location accessible to children) and do not
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When the
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is
controls, or move the vehicle.
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 433
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
CAUTION!
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF will not move out of PARK.
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift REVERSE (R)
lever could result. This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this stop.
can damage the drivetrain. 5
NEUTRAL (N)
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
tion:
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
WARNING!
This range should be used for most city and highway
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
practices that limit your response to changing traffic automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
or road conditions. You might lose control of the third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
vehicle and have a collision. sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
CAUTION! When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
for further information. tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 435
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat- Transmission Limp Home Mode
ing limits, the transmission controller will modify the
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
transmission may operate differently until the transmis-
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
sion cools down.
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
During very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below), driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- 5
transmission operation may be modified depending on aging the transmission.
engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the service is required.
following steps:
Overdrive Operation
1. Stop the vehicle. The automatic transmission includes an electronically
2. Shift the transmission into PARK. controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. ditions are present:
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. • The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
5. Restart the engine. • The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no perature.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.
operation.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your • The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Torque Converter Clutch AUTOSTICK®
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. providing manual shift control, giving you more control
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
different feeling or response during normal operation in shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during system can also provide you with more control during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, and many other situations.
NOTE: Engagement of the torque converter clutch is 5
inhibited at very cold temperatures. Because the engine Operation
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (beside
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and
into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. The torque rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
converter clutch will function normally once the trans- transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
mission is sufficiently warm. forward (-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster. In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift
up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or • With 2.0L or 2.4L engine, you can start out, from a stop,
overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho- allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second
sen, except as described below. gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• For all models except GT, the transmission will auto- • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
matically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed, that shift will not occur.
over-speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is en-
• For GT models, the transmission will remain in the gaged.
selected gear even when maximum engine speed is
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
reached. The transmission will upshift only when
AutoStick® is engaged.
commanded by the driver. Engine overspeed protec-
tion is provided by the engine controls. • If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the • If the system detects a problem, it will disable
vehicle is accelerated. AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 439
To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
Acceleration
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal. Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
WARNING! erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a the front (driving) wheels.
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
WARNING! 5
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
Flowing/Rising Water
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
WARNING!
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy. Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
become visible. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
4. Keep tires properly inflated. warning may result in injuries that are serious or
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Shallow Standing Water
CAUTION!
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions • Always check the depth of the standing water
and Warnings before doing so. before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
WARNING! the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph the way before driving through the standing water.
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving 5
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- through standing water. This will minimize wave
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping effects.
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the (Continued)
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans- automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., in REVERSE or first gear.
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Parking Brake
 STARTING AND OPERATING 443
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. • This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
completely. from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out
NOTE: of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied 5
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
WARNING!
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
brake before attempting to move the vehicle. parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)
444 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with failure and a collision.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to • Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
number of reasons. A child or others could be injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal and cause damage or injury.
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or CAUTION!
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
mode. A child could operate power windows, other is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
controls, or move the vehicle. authorized dealer immediately.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 445
POWER STEERING If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
The electric power steering system will give you good and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to
the electric steering system experiences a fault that “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understand-
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle NOTE:
manually.
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer 5
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
WARNING!
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be during parking maneuvers.
obtained as soon as possible. • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
brake control system. This system includes Anti-Lock planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
Trailer Sway Control (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
Lock Differential (BLD), and Electronic Stability Control bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
(ESC). These systems work together to enhance both ve- exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
hicle stability and control in various driving conditions. could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing vehicle stability and brake performance under most
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in- braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in wheel lock, reduces stop distance, and enhances vehicle
control during stop.
(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 447
When the vehicle is driven over 6 mph (10 km/h), you These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per- WARNING!
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
vehicle is started and accelerated past 6 mph (10 km/h). ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
debris, or panic stops.
performed by qualified professionals.
5
You also may experience the following when the brake • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
system goes into anti-lock: their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
short time after the stop). press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves. slow down or stop.
• Brake pedal pulsations. (Continued)
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni-
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded tors the ABS. The light will turn on when the
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or ignition switch is turned to the ON position
the traction afforded. and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. brake system is not functioning and that service is
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must required. However, the conventional brake system will
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous continue to operate normally if the “Brake System Warn-
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or ing Light” is not on.
the safety of others.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
accurate signals for the computer. does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 449
If both the “Brake System Warning Light” and the “ABS
WARNING!
Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
Brake Assist System (BAS) afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens- equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize 5
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help the user’s safety or the safety of others.
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best Traction Control System (TCS)
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
must apply continuous braking pressure during the the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is stability. A feature of the TCS functions similar to a
deactivated. limited slip differential (BLD) and controls the wheel spin
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in other vehicles.
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for more information. WARNING!
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or the user’s safety or the safety of others.
evasive driving maneuvers.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
WARNING! (Continued)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
• If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once the exces-
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
sively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC is function-
ing, the “ESC Light” will flash, the engine power will be trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
reduced, and you will feel the brake being applied to • Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
individual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from accident or serious personal injury.
swaying.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when 5
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
WARNING! period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
• TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the during this short period of time, the system will release
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Vehicle brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
Operating” for further information. amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
(Continued)
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Start Assist Disable Procedure 7. Apply brake pedal.
NOTE: Vehicle roll back mitigation will not be present 8. Turn steering wheel 200 degrees counter clockwise,
with this feature disabled. just over half a turn from center position. Press the
Hill Start assist can be disabled if desired. This procedure “ESC off” button four times.
applies to vehicles equipped with a manual or Powertech 9. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and continue
transmission. in a clockwise direction until 200 degrees past center.
1. Wheels must be pointed straight ahead, on a level 10. Turn the ignition to OFF position.
surface.
11. If procedure was done correctly, ESC malfunction
2. Automatic transmission should be in PARK. lamp will flash four times after engine starts.
3. Place manual transmission in NEUTRAL if equipped. 12. Procedure must be completed within 90 seconds.
4. Begin with the ignition OFF. 13. Repeat the condition to re-enable Hill Start Assist
(HSA).
5. Engage park brake.
6. Start engine and wait for ESC OFF lamp to turn off.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 453
HSA Activation Criteria
WARNING!
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate: There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
• Vehicle must be stopped. will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
• Vehicle must be on a 3% (manual transmission), 3.5% could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
(automated manual transmission), or 8% grade or Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
greater (automatic transmission) hill. ing the vehicle.

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., Towing With HSA 5
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear). when pulling a trailer.
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your • Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
brake pedal is released there may not be enough serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
hill and this could cause a collision with another driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off if
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
mation Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
responsible for braking the vehicle.
ment Panel” for further information.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ESC Operating Modes
This system enhances directional control and stability of The ESC system has two available operating modes.
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
Full On
rects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
the desired path. mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
ESC reduces engine torque and applies brake pressure to
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
select individual wheels to mitigate vehicle under-steer 5
and vehicle over-steer. The system uses engine torque Partial Off
reduction along with individual wheel brake pressure to
The “ESC Off” button is located in the switch bank above
correct under-steer and over-steer conditions.
the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the “ESC
appropriate for the steering wheel position. Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
WARNING!
ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off”
• When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de- ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the ⴖESC Off Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated.
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the engine power The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys- when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
tem is reduced. position. It should go out with the engine
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the running. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode. Light” will flash to indicate the system is actively cor-
recting an undesirable vehicle condition. This includes
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting Yaw control, traction control, and trailer sway control. If
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to the lamp remains solid under normal driving conditions,
allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud, your vehicle should be serviced at an authorized dealer.
sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” starts
accomplished by momentarily pressing the “ESC off”
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the
system becomes active.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 457
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also • The ESC system may make buzzing or clicking sounds
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) or trailer when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
sway is active. If the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease that caused the ESC activation.
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
ESC Off Indicator Light
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
NOTE: Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC 5
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. In some cases, when accelerating from stop on steep
grades, it may be beneficial to turn off ESC. Once the
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system grade ascent is complete, ESC can be turned on again.
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
Tire Markings • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
Code (TIN) ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5 — Maximum Pressure
2 — Size Designation
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
3 — Service Description Temperature Grades
 STARTING AND OPERATING 459
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards 5
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
460 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
 STARTING AND OPERATING 461

EXAMPLE:
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under speci-
fied operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed
limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure 5
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
 STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
5
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 465
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu- 5
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 467

5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause collisions.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
• Safety lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
 STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
right or left. ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
mended cold tire inflation pressure. sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Economy
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-
erratic and unpredictable steering response. 5
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling vehicle to drift left or right.
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
door. been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
At least once a month: inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION! when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) WARNING!
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
5
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- 75 mph (120 km/h).
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial Ply Tires Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
WARNING! Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al- service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never Tire Types
combine them with other types of tires.
All Season Tires — If Equipped
Tire Repair
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
meets the following criteria: tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
(sidewall damage is not repairable). handling of your vehicle.
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
 STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
safety and handling of your vehicle.
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au- was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
the tire sidewall. original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold 5
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
tire inflation pressures.
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. checked before using these tire types.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Spare Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the In Emergencies” for further information.
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a CAUTION!
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi- Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Wheel — If Equipped
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
tire rotation pattern.
wheel on the vehicle at any given time. 5
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. WARNING!
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on only. With these spares, do not drive more than
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M. (Continued)
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
first opportunity.
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Tire Spinning
WARNING!
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In- spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the ping.
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located Emergencies” for further information.
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original WARNING! 5
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
of vehicle control. age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
replaced.
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
1 — Worn Tire tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
2 — New Tire
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
WARNING!
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
You could lose control and have a collision resulting manual for more information relating to the Load Index
in serious injury or death. and Speed Symbol of a tire.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously 5
with oil, grease, and gasoline. affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
480 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations capacity, other than what was originally equipped
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
pension dimensions and performance characteris- index could result in tire overloading and failure.
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and You could lose control and have a collision.
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict- • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
sion components. You could lose control and have failure and loss of vehicle control.
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings CAUTION!
approved for your vehicle.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
(Continued) result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 481
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
CAUTION!
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
against damage. following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as tween tires and other suspension components, it is
recommended by the traction device manufacturer important that only traction devices in good condi-
• Install on Front Tires tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
• Due to limited clearance, a 225/45R17 tire with a occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove 5
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile the damaged parts of the device before further use.
traction device or equivalent is recommended • Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
WARNING! • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
ment.

(Continued)
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
CAUTION! (Continued)
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
suggested operating speed of the device manufac- shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive
tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation
will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet
traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Tire Rotation
 STARTING AND OPERATING 483
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
mended cold placard pressure. natural pressure loss through the tire.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
(7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de- off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on “cold cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire pressure
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended 5
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no order for the TPMS to receive this information.
adjustment for this increased pressure.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
CAUTION!
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire warning have been established for the tire size
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire eration or sensor damage may result when using
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
placard pressure value. your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 485
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
CAUTION! (Continued)
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stopping ability.
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
NOTE: correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care 5
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
Light.
or condition.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
while adjusting your tire pressure.
the tire.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Base System Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the nate in the instrument cluster, a ⬙LOW TIRE PRESSURE⬙
instrument cluster. message and “Inflate Tire to XX” message will be dis-
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim played for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev- chime will be activated when one or more of the four
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
Module. pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the value. The recommended cold placard pressure value is
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly the pressure value in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message
and to maintain the proper pressure. displayed in the EVIC. The system will automatically
The TPMS consists of the following components: update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish and the ⬙LOW TIRE PRESSURE⬙ and “Inflate
• Receiver Module. Tire to XX” messages will turn off once the updated tire
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. receive this information.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Service TPMS Warnings 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
wheel and tire assembly.
a chime and display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds. If the ignition key is 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following 5
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
scenarios:
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the and ⬙LOW TIRE PRESSURE⬙ and “Inflate Tire to XX”
TPM sensors. messages will still turn ON due to the low tire.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
that affects radio wave signals. utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
75 seconds and then remain on solid and a “SERVICE Premium System — If Equipped
TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for a mini- The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mum of five seconds. mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on module.
solid and a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
displayed for a minimum of five seconds. tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and the proper pressure.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare The TPMS consists of the following components:
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as • Receiver Module
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
receive this information. Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
 STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings cold placard pressure value. The system will automati-
cally update, the “Inflate Tire to XX” message will no
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
longer be displayed, the graphic display of the pressure
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
value(s) will stop flashing or return to their normal color,
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
In addition, the EVIC will display a “Inflate Tire to XX”
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing or Service TPMS Message
displayed in a different color. The recommended cold 5
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
placard pressure inflation value is the pressure value
and off for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid when a
displayed in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message displayed in
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
the EVIC.
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
and inflate all tires that are flashing or in a different color in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire
on the graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault wheel and tire assembly.
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios: 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn
TPM sensors. ON due to the low tire. The “Inflate Tire to XX” message
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting and the graphic with the low tire pressure flashing or in
a different color will be displayed.
that affects radio wave signals.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure values.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 491
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will General Information
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM following conditions:
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure • This device may not cause harmful interference.
values. • This device must accept any interference received,
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and including interference that may cause undesired op-
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare eration.
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the 5
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as following licenses:
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The United States KR55WY9012
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes Canada 7812D-5WY9012
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
1.4L Turbo Engine
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
This engine is designed to meet all emis- as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
sion regulations and provide satisfactory ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
fuel economy and performance when us- before considering service for the vehicle.
ing high-quality unleaded ⬙regular⬙ gaso-
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
line having an octane rating of 87. For
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
octane or higher is recommended.
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
2.0L And 2.4L Engine and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe- line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
prove air quality. lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso- cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro- nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. 5
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Non-Flex Fuel (FFV) vehicles are compatible with gaso- E-85 perform the following:
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher • Change the engine oil and oil filter
ethanol content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: • Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• Operate in a lean mode More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
MMT In Gasoline
• Poor engine performance
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
• Poor cold start and cold driveability is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
 STARTING AND OPERATING 495
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline Fuel System Cautions
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, CAUTION!
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
and California reformulated gasoline. performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Materials Added To Fuel Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
5
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost. overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
fuel. or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.

(Continued)
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being WARNING!
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor- Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
mance problems resulting from the use of such monoxide poisoning:
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
manufacturer. monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against engine running for an extended period. If the
you. vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 497
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located on the
WARNING! (Continued)
driver’s side door trim).
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every 2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal cap.
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle. 5
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the right side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle. Fuel Filler Cap
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
CAUTION! (Continued)
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the off” the fuel tank after filling.
door.
3. Hang cap by tether on fill door to prevent damage to WARNING!
body side. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
CAUTION! being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
system could result from using an improper fuel
tions and may cause the malfunction indicator light
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
to turn on.
rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
escaping from the system.
the ground while filling.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 499
NOTE: 3. Insert finger into half circle opening and pull flap open
to access the cable.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled. 5
Manual Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the
manual fuel filler door release.
Release Cable Access Door Cut Out
1. Open the trunk.
2. Locate the release cable access door cut out on the
right side of the trunk trim.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Pull the release cable. Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Release Cable
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Curb Weight
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
GVWR. loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
Tire Size
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents added.
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Overloading 5
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
Rim Size
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
listed.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
Inflation Pressure vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
all loading conditions up to full GAWR. it is not over the GVWR.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and TRAILER TOWING
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo- In this section you will find safety tips and information
nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
Loading with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
and safely as possible.
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
items securely before driving. Improper weight distribu- follow the requirements and recommendations in this
tion can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
steers and handles, and the way the brakes operate.
Common Towing Definitions
CAUTION! The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
shorten the life of your vehicle. weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
 STARTING AND OPERATING 503
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
further information. axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either the front
or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certi-
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
fication Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
information.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
WARNING!
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a 5
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
supported by the scale. front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
part of the load on your vehicle. hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
Frontal Area
sized trailers.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer. Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
Trailer Sway Control
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s direc-
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
swaying motions while traveling. consistent steering and brake control and thereby en-
hancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds, contributing positively to tow
 STARTING AND OPERATING 505
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
Max. Trailer Hitch
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be Class
Industry Standards
required depending on Vehicle and Trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR require- Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
ments. Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for Duty
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum 5
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum GTW towable drivetrain.
for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer 1.4L Turbo Engine
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer towing is not recommended.

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW Max. Tongue Wt.

(Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note)
2.0L and 2.4L Auto/ 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
Man
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight severely from side-to-side which will cause loss of con-
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in trol of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway your bumper or trailer hitch.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 507
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information Placard” in
“Tire Safety Information” for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- 5
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: CAUTION!
• The tongue weight of the trailer. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
put in or on your vehicle. or other parts could be damaged.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. (Continued)
508 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING!

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps possible:
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
the heavier loads. and will not shift during travel. When trailering
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
GAWR or GCWR ratings. have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steer-
ing, suspension, chassis structure or tires.

(Continued)
 STARTING AND OPERATING 509

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Safety chains must always be used between your • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. ratings are not exceeded:
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
1. GVWR
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a 2. GTW
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on 3. GAWR
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic 5
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmis- 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
sion, shift the transmission into REVERSE. Always lized.
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.

(Continued)
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
spare tire. vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe This could cause inadequate braking and possible
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to personal injury.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures. required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
sures before trailer usage. a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the 1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
proper inspection procedure. 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire replace-
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
CAUTION!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg) stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they motoring safety.
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
WARNING! NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness. 5
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydrau-
lic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
need them and could have a collision. Refer to the following illustrations.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of
you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park 1 — Battery 5 — Ground

2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
 STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Towing Tips If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
mission fluid and filter as specified for severe usage
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
(police, fleet, taxi, or frequent trailer towing). Refer to the
traffic.
⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙ for the proper maintenance in-
Manual Transmission — If Equipped tervals.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, AutoStick®
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
slippage.
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and 5
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose ⬙4⬙ if
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How- the desired speed can be maintained. Choose ⬙3⬙ or ⬙2⬙ if
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the needed to maintain the desired speed.
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear. To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor- to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces- higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also conditions allow.
provide better engine braking.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped Highway Driving
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. Reduce speed.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed Air Conditioning
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Turn off temporarily.
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
 STARTING AND OPERATING 515
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic

Transmission
Flat Tow None • Transmission in NOT ALLOWED
NEUTRAL
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED 5
On Trailer All OK OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmis-
sion is in the NEUTRAL position.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly
can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .519 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .532
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .519 ▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .532
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 6
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .522
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .551
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
center of the instrument panel. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for system adds heat to the engine cooling system and 6
other motorists. turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops properly calibrated torque wrench.
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for Torque Specifications
service.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/
Bolt Size Bolt
WARNING! Socket
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine Size
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If 100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521

6
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can be used in
outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a TIREFIT Components
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). 1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
TIREFIT Storage 3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on bottom
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk. side of TIREFIT Kit)
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
to indicate the air or sealant mode. turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Selecting Air Mode Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
this mode. pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and TIREFIT Usage Precautions 6
turn to this position to inject the TIRE- • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
selecting this mode. optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean water,
and a damp cloth will remove the material from the
vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
tire application use and need to be replaced after each sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only in-
use. Always replace these components immediately at tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
your original equipment vehicle dealer. in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the • Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the source.
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using • A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
the TIREFIT kit. or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
following circumstances: provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
1/4” (6 mm) or larger. your passengers, and others around you.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage. • Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
– If the tire has any damage from driving with come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIRE- 6
extremely low tire pressure. FIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respira-
tire. tory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
– If the wheel has any damage. water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
the wheel. contact with clothing.

(Continued)
(Continued)
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
WARNING! (Continued)
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce 4. Set the parking brake.
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT: Sealant Mode position.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
Hazard Warning flashers. from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. deflated tire.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
valve stem.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
nails) from the tire. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Tire:
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIREFIT and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
kit. On the TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if 6
available. Make sure the engine is running before
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). mended inflation pressure before continuing.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to ment panel.
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the (D) Drive Vehicle:
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve- distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
hicle.” exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
CAUTION! WARNING!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con- tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this 6
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte- warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(E) After Driving: If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing. inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position. opening.

2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
stem. reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
the vehicle further. Call for assistance. service center.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing.
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho- the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
using the TIREFIT service kit. bottle is locked into place.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
vehicle.
6
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when Avoid ice or slippery areas.
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get and spare tire.
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift. 1. Open the trunk.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
on a jack.

(Continued)
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533

6
Pull Strap Jack Location
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire. 4. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly.
5. Remove the spare tire.
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WARNING!
3. Set the parking brake.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- 4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in 5. Turn OFF the ignition.
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
Preparations For Jacking example, if changing the right front
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the tire, block the left rear wheel.
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.

WARNING!
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the when the vehicle is being jacked.
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
help prevent personal injury or damage to your you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
vehicle: service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
vehicle. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. careful of motor traffic.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to 6
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Jack Warning Label
(Continued)
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
CAUTION!
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking expanded, the tension between the two attachment
Instructions for this vehicle. points holds the jack handle in place.

Jacking Locations Removing Jack Handle From Jack

 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to 6
firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the Front Jacking Location
sill flange, centering the jack saddle between the
locating notches on the sill flange.
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

7. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!
Rear Jacking Location Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
and install the spare tire. spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts. 6
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
WARNING!
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper repaired or replaced immediately.
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight- Road Tire Installation
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station. Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
11. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
assembly using the means provided. Release the which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
parking brake before driving the vehicle. wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
12. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has 6
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover result in personal injury.
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel bolt 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the Road Tire Installation
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, tighten the wheel bolts.
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station. WARNING!
7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
assembly using the means provided. Release the park- result in personal injury.
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
handle counterclockwise.
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel precautions.
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
CAUTION! 6
ing brake before driving the vehicle. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque other booster source with a system voltage greater
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
properly seated against the wheel. alternator or electrical system may occur.
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
Positive Battery Post
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
WARNING!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by WARNING!
moving fan blades.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
could establish a ground connection and personal
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
injury could result.
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump-Starting Procedure
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
WARNING!
6
sparks away from the battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission result in personal injury or property damage due to
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and battery explosion.
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION! WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
or the discharged vehicle. cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
Connecting The Jumper Cables ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the parts.
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
CAUTION!
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis- in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
charged battery. battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering
6
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
discharged battery. REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd Gear and
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle REVERSE (with manual transmission) while gently press-
you should have the battery and charging system in- ing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
spected at your authorized dealer. pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: 1.4L Turbo automatic transmission vehicles can- NOTE: Press the ESC off switch, to place the Electronic
not be rocked in this manner, because the transmission Stability Control (ESC) system in “partial off” mode,
will not allow shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE while before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
the wheels are turning. Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ESC off
CAUTION! switch again to restore ESC on mode.

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to CAUTION!

transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
least one minute after every five rocking-motion tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during train damage may result.
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
3. Remove the rubber storage tray liner from the center
WARNING!
console, then lift up the front of the shift lever bezel,
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- carefully disengage the bezel from the shift lever
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or housing, and slide it up to the top of the shift lever.
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 6

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF. Shift Lever Bezel

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the access slot at the front of the shift lever assembly,
and push and hold the white override release lever
down.

Shift Lever
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever bezel (use care to avoid
pinching the wiring), and the rubber storage tray liner.
Override Release Tab
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.

Towing Condition WheelsOFF The Ground AUTOMATIC MANUAL

TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Trans in NEUTRAL
Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL OK OK
6
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is vehicles under tow must be observed.
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
Automatic transmission vehicles must be towed with
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing. all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not CAUTION!
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
towing. drivetrain will result.
• Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.) can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Dam-
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN age from improper towing is not covered under the
position, not the ACC position. New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
CAUTION!
discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission • DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition
out of PARK for loading onto a flatbed truck. is related to the clutch, transmission or driveline.
Manual Transmission Additional damage to the drivetrain could result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
• The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle quirements can cause severe engine, transmission,
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. or drivetrain damage. Damage from improper tow-
• Manual transmission vehicles can also be flat towed ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
(all four wheels on the ground) with the transmission Warranty.
in NEUTRAL.
6
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .557 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L . . . . . . . . . .558 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .559 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .560 ▫ Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .560 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
7
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .586 ▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .588 ▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .609
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Body Control Module (BCM) Fuses . . . . . . . . .601
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO

7
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Level Indicator 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Battery
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Level Indicator
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

7
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Level Indicator
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be dis-
soon as possible. played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
persists, the message will appear the next time the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
light off. ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
PROGRAMS which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to 7
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing. position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen: ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
DEALER SERVICE
WARNING!
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service You can be badly injured working on or around a
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
available which include detailed service information for have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
attempting any procedure yourself. job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you. The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed 7
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Checking Oil Level
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
result in more costly repairs, damage to other maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor- intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the
repair center. engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level
when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter- only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo- the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine, range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
transmission, power steering or air conditioning. consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
component malfunction, use only the specified of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full
fluid for the flushing procedure. end of the indicator range.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine
CAUTION!
For best performance and maximum protection for all
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine engines under all types of operating conditions, the
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This tified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991.
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L And 2.4L Engine
Change Engine Oil
For best performance and maximum protection for all
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is engines under all types of operating conditions, the
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- tified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of
tion. Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
7
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L And
Engine 2.4L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil or equivalent MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all oper- or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-
ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem- peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
perature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
viscosity grade for your engine. grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used. ber should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi- maintenance intervals.
nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.
Contact your authorized dealer, service station or govern- WARNING!
mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil
filters can be safely discarded in your area. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
Engine Oil Filter backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
at every engine oil change. for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
Engine Oil Filter Selection vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in 7
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality serious personal injury.
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
WARNING!
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom- to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
mended. over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
Tires diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
Checking For Tire Wear “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Once a month, check the tire inflation pressures and look • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
for unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign of flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator a booster battery or any other booster source with
system turns on. an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
Maintenance-Free Battery clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
after handling.
tenance required.
(Continued)
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should not be disconnected and should only be should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
CAUTION! time.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the WARNING!
positive post and the negative cable is attached to • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other 7
terminal posts and free of corrosion. unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be- Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not for further warranty information.
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
(Continued)
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
WARNING! (Continued)
Equipped
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
should be done by an experienced technician. ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling A/C Air Filter
HFO 1234yf — If Equipped Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro- maintenance intervals.
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product WARNING!
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser- Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service operating or personal injury may result.
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system lower right of center console. Perform the following
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout. (located
on the right side of the center console). 7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Passenger Side Console Closeout Filter Cover Retaining Tab

2. Disengage the retaining tab that secures the filter 3. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover. housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573

CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.

5. Install the passenger side console closeout.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Removal
4. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position 7
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
When installing the filter cover, make sure the retain-
ing tab fully engages the cover.
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, tions of salt or road film.
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after from a dry windshield.
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
components to ensure proper function. When performing the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha- petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine com- The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
partment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent system.
only (not radiator antifreeze).
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
wiper blades, this will help blade performance. To prevent have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
the temperature range of your climate. This rating informa- or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
tion can be found on most washer fluid containers.
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
WARNING!
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised 7
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain • The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
information. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
over materials that can burn. Such materials might involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve- Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con- malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
tact anything that can burn. resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage. motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica- 7
tions, should be obtained immediately.
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
WARNING! months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
controlled and can start at any time the ignition freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
switch is in the ON position. accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If face of the condenser.
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
pressure cap when the radiator is hot. sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
needed to be added to the system please contact your gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
local authorized dealer. ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
Selection Of Coolant system in an emergency, the cooling system will
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION! • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and 7
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine may plug the radiator.
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
ant is different and should not be mixed with Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
vent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
your vehicle. engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
WARNING!
needed to be added to the system please contact your • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
local authorized dealer. cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom- Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
possible. pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure. 7
Cooling System Pressure Cap • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
coolant (antifreeze). gine damage may result.
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
with your local authorities to determine the disposal maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
Points To Remember
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
spills immediately. from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
Coolant Level mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
method for determining that the coolant level is ad- coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the condenser clean.
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
bottle must also be protected against freezing. ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
for leaks. sions.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Brake System

7
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
MS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro- system components should be inspected periodically.
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
ponents. maintenance intervals.
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
WARNING!
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
possible brake damage. You would not have your full systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
braking capacity in an emergency. system will not affect the other system. The manual
Brake Master Cylinder transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
when performing under hood services, or immediately if not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
the brake system warning light is on. result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before your local authorized dealer for service.
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely This could result in a collision.
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor- • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
vehicle is also identified on the original factory the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. 7
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the This could result in a collision.

(Continued)
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
system performance. Improper brake fluids may dam- turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
age the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch func- in transmission shift quality, and will require more
tion and the ability to shift the transmission. frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped fluid specifications.
Selection Of Lubricant
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to only the approved lubricant should be used.
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Special Additives Fluid Level Check
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
any special additives in the transmission. require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
check your transmission fluid level using special service
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
the fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission dam-
adversely affect seals.
age.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
7
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid and Filter Changes Fluid Level Check
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at The transmission is designed to be fill for life. The oil
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the does not need to be check unless there is an oil leak.
life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is used for Should the transmission be leaking oil, the transmission
frequent trailer towing, police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the should be serviced to correct the condition.
fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule. In addi-
Frequency Of Fluid Change
tion, change the fluid (and filter, if equipped) if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans- Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
mission is disassembled for any reason. the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
cant has become contaminated with water.
Lubricant Selection
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission changed immediately.
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads The most common causes are:
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside • Stone and gravel impact.
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami- • Insects, tree sap and tar.
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi- • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
underbody protection.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
7
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle. car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® a month.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that open.
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
CAUTION! considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
scratch metal and painted surfaces. have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint the owner.
and decals.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
packaged and sealed. or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle. CAUTION!
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions 7
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. equivalent is recommended.
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Interior Care
Equipped Use MOPAR® Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: fabric upholstery and MOPAR® Carpet Cleaner or
equivalent for carpeting.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel. Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR® Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean or or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
mended for leather upholstery.
remove soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
soap residue.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
protectants on Stain Repel products. taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition. lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
WARNING! wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Glass Surfaces
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner or any commercial
Cleaning Headlights household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
7
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. scratch the elements.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
directly on the mirror. molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Instrument Panel Cover must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which 1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use soap solution may be used, but do not use high
protectants or other products which may cause undesir- alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
low glare surface.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Instrument Panel Bezels
Seat Belt Maintenance
CAUTION! Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve- Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a FUSES
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft WARNING!
cloth.
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
buckles do not work properly. the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
WARNING! fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
injury, fire and/or property damage.
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
is off and that all the other services are switched off
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
and/or disengaged. 7
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
rized dealer.
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
(Continued)
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Fuses
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air The interior fuses are located on the drivers side under
bag system, braking system), power unit systems the instrument panel.
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Description

Fuse
F1 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F2 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats, Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
F3 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist Module, Rear Camera, Left and Right Blind
Spot Sensor, Compass – If Equipped
F4 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F5 – 10 Amp Red HVAC, Humidity Sensor, In-Car Temperature Sensor, Inside
Mirror Assembly
F18 – 15 Amp Blue Radio
F19 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597

Cavity Cartridge Mini Fuse Description

Fuse
F20 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module, Switch Bank
F21 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F22 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener, EOM
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof
F24 – 5 Amp Tan Run/Accessory Relay
F25 – 5 Amp Tan Transmission Control Module #4
F26 – 5 Amp Tan Stop Lamp Switch
F27 – 10 Amp Red Pneumatic Lumbar Support

7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located on the right side
of the engine compartment, behind the battery.

Power Distribution Center

Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – Body Control Module #1
F02 60 Amp Blue – Body Control Module #2
F03 30 Amp Green – Output For Starter Relay #1
F04 40 Amp Orange – ESC Pump Motor
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599

Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F05 40 Amp Orange – Transmission Control Module #1
F06 30 Amp Green – Body Control Module #3
F07 40 Amp Orange – EBL RLY Coil, Blower Motor RLY Coil
F09 – 5 Amp Tan Radiator Fan
F10 – 10 Amp Red ORC
F11 – 20 Amp Yellow Run/Start, Engine Control Module
F14 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module #2
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module #3
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Engine Control Module, Ignition Coils
F17 – 15 Amp Blue Brake System Module
7
F18 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module
F19 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster (EBL)
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F22 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F23 – 25 Amp Natural Brake System Module
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module, Fuel Injectors
F30 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Console)
F81 60 Amp Blue – Interior PDC Battery Feed, Power Seats
F82 30 Amp Green – Amplifier
F83 40 Amp Orange – HVAC Blower Motor
F84 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F85 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof, LRSM, Power Outlet (Console),
UCI/AUX Port, Cigar Lighter
F86 – 20 Amp Yellow –
F87 – 10 Amp Red Wastegate, Purge Solenoid, OBD Vent
Valve, Oxygen Sensor Heaters
F88 – 10 Amp Red Heated Outside Mirrors
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Body Control Module (BCM) Fuses

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F12 – – Spare
F13 – 15 Amp Blue Left Headlamp
F31 – – Spare
F32 – 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting/Decklid/Liftgate Release
F33 – 25 Amp Clear Window Motor – Driver
F34 – 25 Amp Clear Window Motor – Passenger
F36 – 15 Amp Blue Intrusion Module
F37 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster
F38 – 20 Amp Yellow Door Locks 7
F42 – – Spare
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Windshield Washer Pump
F47 – 5 Amp Tan Transmission Control Module (Tcm)
F48 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description

F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown Stop Lamp Switch
F50 – 7.5 Amp Brown Pneumatic Lumbar Support
F51 – 7.5 Amp Brown Cd/Hands-Free Module – Bluetooth/Radio Display
F53 – 7.5 Amp Brown Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors
F89 – 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp
F90 – 7.5 Amp Brown Front Fog Lamps – Right
F91 – 7.5 Amp Brown Front Fog Lamps – Left
F92 – 7.5 Amp Brown High Beams (Shutters)
F93 – 15 Amp Blue Right Headlamp
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your Interior Bulbs
battery. Bulb Number
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Dome Lamp W5W
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Overhead Console Lamp W5W
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Exterior Bulbs
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Bulb Number
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Low Beam/High Beam HIR2
possibility of compressor damage when the system is (Bi-Halogen Headlamp)
started again.
Low Beam/High Beam D3S 7
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven (Bi-Xenon Headlamp)
for at least 35 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is Front Park/Turn Signal 7442NALL
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce- Lamp
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa- Sidemarker Lamp 194
tion.
Front Fog Lamp H11
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Bulb Number Headlamps

Center High-Mounted LED (Serviced at Halogen Headlamps
Stop Lamp (CHMSL) Authorized Dealer)
Can be serviced by removing the cap from the backside
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn LED (Serviced at of the headlamp. Remove the HIR2 bulb from the con-
Signal Lamp Authorized Dealer) nector and replacing the bulb. Reinstall bulb and cap.
Backup Lamp 7440
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
License Lamp 168
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
BULB REPLACEMENT High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
conditions change to allow the condensation to change authorized dealer for service.
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605

WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.

Backup Lamps
1. Open trunk.
2. Remove trim cover.
Trim Cover
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn counter clock-
wise to remove.

Backup Bulb
5. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn clockwise to
Bulb Socket install.
4. Replace bulb. 6. Install trim cover.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.

1 — License Lamp Bulb

2 — Socket 7
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Fuel (1.4L Engines) 13.2 Gallons 50 Liters
Fuel (2.0L/2.4L Engines) 14.2 Gallons 54 Liters
Fuel (2.4L GT models only) 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified) 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
2.0L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® OAT Antifreeze/Engine 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR® OAT Antifreeze/Engine 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991 such as
MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil – 2.0L and 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the 7
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.026 in [0.65 mm]).
Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.047 in [1.2 mm]).
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable.
Fuel Selection – 2.0L and 87 Octane.
2.4L Engine
 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to
(1.4L Turbo Engine) – If Equipped use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Automatic Transmission (2.0L And MOPAR® SP-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to
2.4L Engine) – If Equipped use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission
Manual Transmission – If We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid.
Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. 7
 M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
CONTENTS N
A
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 ▫ Required Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 614 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Severe Duty All Models
N
T Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
E indicator system. The oil change indicator system will is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
N remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
A
N scheduled maintenance. • Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
C
E Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change Check engine oil level.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
S vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Check windshield washer fluid level.
C
H such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
E cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will wear or damage.
D influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
U Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake
L Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
master cylinder as needed.
E message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
S since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8 possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 615 M
A
Required Maintenance At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil I
Change Indicator System: N
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following T
pages for required maintenance. • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses E
and park brake. N
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil A
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and N
Change Indicator System: hoses. C
• Change engine oil and filter. E
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu- • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
S
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator C
off-road conditions. H
system turns on. E
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as D
U
required. L
E
S
8
M 616 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
E Mileage Or Time Passed
N (Whichever Comes First)
A
N
C Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000
E Or Kilometers:
S
C
H Additional Inspections
E
D Inspect CV joint boots. X X X X X
U Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and replace
X X X X X X X
L as necessary.
E Inspect brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
S
Additional Maintenance
8
Replace the cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the spark plugs (1.4L Turbo Engine).** X X X X X
 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 617 M
A
I
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First) N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000
Or Kilometers: N
C
E
Replace the spark plugs (2.0L and 2.4L Engine).** X S
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or C
X X H
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
E
Change the transmission fluid (manual, or 1.4L D
turbo automatic) if using your vehicle for any of the U
following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, L
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, des- X X X E
ert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at S
sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C).
8
M 618 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000
Mileage Or Time Passed
N (Whichever Comes First)
T
E
N Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A
32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000
N Or Kilometers:
C
E
S Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter
C (2.0L, 2.4L engines only) if you frequently drive: on
H rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads, on
X X
E short trips, in heavy city traffic during hot weather,
D or while towing a trailer, or if you use the vehicle for
U police, taxi, or in a commercial fleet.
L
E Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
S Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo Engine). X
8 ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 619 M
A
WARNING! I
N
T
• You can be badly injured working on or around a E
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you N
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If A
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- E
chanic.
S
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve- C
hicle could result in a component malfunction and H
effect vehicle handling and performance. This E
D
could cause an accident. U
L
E
S
8
 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .623 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .624 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .624
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 9
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .628
622 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 623
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality 9
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
624 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 423–6343

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 625
In Mexico Contact: Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Mexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Impaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 9
(800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
WARNING!
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, known to the State of California to cause cancer and
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
contract documents, and contact the person listed in products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
those documents. cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
We appreciate that you have made a major investment and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and WARRANTY INFORMATION
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
concerns.
 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 627
MOPAR® PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
operating at its best. Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could causeIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
roadsafety/
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in 9
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
628 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 629
Call toll free at: Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 9
requirements in addition to these grades.
630 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
WARNING!
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
peak traction characteristics. wheel, than the minimum required by law.

Temperature Grades WARNING!

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, The temperature grade for this tire is established for
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the heat buildup and possible tire failure.
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
INDEX

10
632 INDEX
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Alarm
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .567 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
 INDEX 633
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Bluetooth®
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Audio Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .401 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . .189
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Brake Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
10
634 INDEX
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .318
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .608 Child Restraints
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Caps, Filler Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .98
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .91
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Cleaning
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
 INDEX 635
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Compact Disc (CD) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Connector Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .380 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .581 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
10
636 INDEX
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Driving
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Dipsticks Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Disposal Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Door Locks Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .35 Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .252
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .321
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Emergency, In Case of
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
 INDEX 637
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .561 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Filters
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
10
638 INDEX
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Flashers Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Fluid Level Checks Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .609 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
 INDEX 639
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Hazard
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Gauges Headlights
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .241
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
10
640 INDEX
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .241 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Hitches Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .245
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Ignition Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Front Courtesy Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter . . . . . . .23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Key Fob
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
 INDEX 641
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .27 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .27 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Keyless Enter-N-Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
10
642 INDEX
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .318
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .457 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .244
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .318
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .308
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
 INDEX 643
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .308 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .318 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
10
644 INDEX
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
 INDEX 645
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Pretensioners
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Phone (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .581
Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .464 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Power Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .287 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570

10
646 INDEX
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Control Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .27 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .27 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .387
Remote Starting Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
 INDEX 647
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Security Alarm
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .56 Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 SENTRY KEY®
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
10
648 INDEX
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .318 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Shifting Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Steering
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .387
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Specifications Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
 INDEX 649
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .61 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .401 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .310 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .464 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Tire Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
10
650 INDEX
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Transmission
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .274
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .515 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .27
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .24
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
 INDEX 651
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .380
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Things You Should Know About Your Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .308
10
652 INDEX
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626 Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Washer Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Water Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi- The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
cle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must shielded coaxial cable.
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
be observed during installation.
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
may require special precautions.
negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal
adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection All installations should be checked for possible interference
should not be fused. between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy
or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
 2014 Dar t
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
Dar t
Chrysler Group LLC
14PFD41-126-AC Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A.